JP6458932B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine.

  There is known a gaming machine that allows two movable effectors to freely fall (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-192228 A

However, if the two movable effectors that are in contact with each other are allowed to fall freely, the two movable effectors may be separated due to the impact of the drop, and the effect may be reduced.
The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a reduction in effect.

(1) The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and the gaming machine is a gaming machine that performs a game (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 or the like), and has a first position. A first accessory (for example, shown in FIG. 44, etc.) movable from a second position (for example, a lower position, etc., shown in FIG. 45, etc.) By driving a first effect movable part 352L), a second accessory that can move from the first position to the second position (for example, the first effect movable part 352R shown in FIG. 44 and the like), and a stepping motor The contact state where the first accessory and the second accessory contact each other (for example, the state where the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R are closed as shown in FIG. 44), and the first The separated state in which the accessory is separated from the second accessory (for example, in FIG. 44) Drive control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 2) that controls the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R to be opened, and the first role. When the object and the second accessory are in the second position, a specific effect (for example, the image shown in FIG. 44E by the process shown in step S605 of FIG. 28 executed by the effect control CPU 120) (For example, an effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 2) that executes an effect displayed on the display device 5, and the drive control means continues energization of the stepping motor, the holding torque of the stepping motor, the first roles equivalent to the second roles was a viable holding means holding control for holding the state (for example, shown in FIG. 42 or the like, the second effect motor or the like When the first accessory and the second accessory move from the first position to the second position (for example, a period from t12 to t13 shown in FIG. 45, etc.), the contact state is maintained. And the holding means does not execute the holding control when the first accessory and the second accessory are in the first position, and the first accessory and the second accessory are: The holding control is executed when moving from the first position to the second position .

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent a reduction in effect.

(2) The gaming machine of (1) above further includes display means capable of displaying (for example, the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 1).

  According to such a gaming machine, the effect of production can be improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), the first accessory and the second accessory move by dropping by their own weight from the first position to the second position ( For example, it may be a dead weight drop from the position of FIG. 38 (A) to the position of (B).

  According to such a gaming machine, the effect of production can be improved.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3), the first accessory and the second accessory are after a predetermined period after moving from the first position to the second position. Further, it may be one that shifts from a contact state to a separation state (for example, a period from t13 to t14 shown in FIG. 45 is provided).

  According to such a gaming machine, the effect of production can be improved.

(5) In the gaming machine of the above (4), the first accessory and the second accessory shift from the contact state to the separated state (for example, from the state shown in FIG. 44 (b) to the state shown in (e)). By doing so, you may further provide the 3rd accessory which appears (for example, shown in FIG. 44).

  According to such a gaming machine, the effect of production can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for game counted on the main board side. It is a figure which illustrates a change category and a change pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning determination process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start time winning process. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of selection of a fluctuation category determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation category determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game state transition process at the time of a change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game state setting process at the time of a change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during a round. (A) is a front view which shows a front part, (B) is a perspective view which shows the state which looked at the front part from diagonally forward. (A) is a perspective view which shows the state which the movable body for production | presentation moved to the downward position, (B) is a perspective view which shows the operation | movement aspect of the 1st production movable body and the 2nd production movable body. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which looked at the front accessory from diagonally forward. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which looked at the front accessory from diagonally back. (A) is a front view which shows the state which has the 2nd gear in a meshing position, (B) is a front view which shows the state which the 2nd gear moved to the meshing release position. (A) is sectional drawing which shows the state which has a holding member in a holding position, (B) is sectional drawing which shows the state which moved to the holding release position. It is the schematic which shows the state which has the movable body for production in the 1st upper position. It is the schematic which shows the state which the movable body for production fell. It is the disassembled perspective view which showed the movable body for 1st effects. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at a part of movable body for 1st effects from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which saw a part of movable body for 1st effects from the front. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation aspect from which the movable body for production will be in a separation state. It is a time chart which shows 1st Embodiment which maintains a state with the static torque of a stepping motor. It is a time chart which shows 2nd Embodiment which maintains a state with the static torque of a stepping motor. It is a time chart which shows 3rd Embodiment which maintains a state with the static torque of a stepping motor. It is a time chart which shows 1st Embodiment which maintains a state with the rotational torque of a DC motor. It is a time chart which shows 2nd Embodiment which maintains a state with the rotational torque of a DC motor. It is a time chart which shows 3rd Embodiment which maintains a state with the rotational torque of a DC motor.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

A normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided in the lower part of the game area of the game board 2. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example.
The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state as a vertical position and an expanded open state as a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) and a second start winning opening are formed. When there is no particular distinction between the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening, they are simply referred to as “start winning opening”.

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the OFF state, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state ( It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to enter.

  In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening. In this way, the second start winning port as the second start area is in an expanded open state in which game balls easily pass (enter) and in a normally open state in which game balls are difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). To change.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) a first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has passed (entered) a second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG.

  In addition, a game ball that has passed (entered) a winning opening such as a starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) or a large winning opening (described later) is provided corresponding to each winning opening. The detection by the switches (first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, count switch 23 (described later)) is referred to as "winning". Of the “winnings”, winning at the starting winning port (first starting winning port or second starting winning port) is referred to as “starting winning”, and in particular, winning at the first starting winning port is referred to as “first starting prize”. The winning at the second starting winning opening is referred to as a second starting winning.

  Based on the occurrence of the first start winning (detection of game balls by the first start port switch 22A), a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls and the first special figure holding memory number (to be described later) ) Is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the first special symbol game (described later) executed in the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in the image display device 5 A first start condition (also referred to as a first execution condition) for executing the variable display game (described later) is satisfied.

  Further, based on the occurrence of the second start winning (detection of game balls by the second start port switch 22B), a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number If (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), a second special symbol game (described later) executed in the second special symbol display device 4B or a decorative symbol executed in the image display device 5 is displayed. A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as variable display (described later) is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the first start prize and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the second start prize may be the same number or different numbers. Good.

  The first special figure reserved memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start winning) that are not immediately executed at the time of occurrence of the first start winning and are temporarily suspended. Even if the first start condition for executing the variable display game such as the first special figure game (described later) and the decorative symbol variable display (described later) is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start winning prize, When the first start condition that permits the start of the above-described variable display game due to the occurrence of a winning is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition that is satisfied first is being executed) If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is put on hold (the variable display game is in a waiting state). That is, the first special figure reserved memory number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the first start winning that is in a waiting state. The number of first special figure holding memory decreases by one every time one first start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, although the first start condition by a certain first start winning is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the first start winning in which the first start condition permitting the start of the variable display game by the first starting winning is not satisfied. Is stored (held) as hold data (first special figure hold information) until the first start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the first start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held first special figure hold information is digested one by one every time the first start condition is satisfied, and a variable display game based on the digested first special figure hold information is executed.

  The second special figure reserved memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start winning) that are not immediately executed when the second start winning occurs but are temporarily suspended. Even if the second start condition for executing the variable display game such as the second special figure game (described later) or the variable display of decorative symbols (described later) is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start winning prize, When the second start condition permitting the start of the above-described variable display game due to the occurrence of a prize is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition established previously is being executed) If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is put on hold (the variable display game is in a waiting state). In other words, the second special figure holding memory number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the second start winning that is in the waiting state for execution. The number of second special figure reservation storage decreases by one every time one second start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, although the 2nd start condition by a certain 2nd start prize is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the 2nd start prize which does not satisfy the 2nd start condition which permits the start of the variable display game by the 2nd start prize Is stored (held) as hold data (second special figure hold information) until a second start condition permitting the start of the variable display game by the second start winning is satisfied. In other words, the second special figure hold information that has been put on hold is digested one by one every time the second start condition is satisfied, and a variable display game based on the second special figure hold information that is digested is executed.

  In addition, the reserved memory number obtained by adding the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number is referred to as a “total reserved memory number”. When there is no particular distinction between the first special figure reserved memory number, the second special figure reserved memory number, and the total reserved memory number, it is usually simply referred to as “special figure reserved memory number” or “hold memory number”. , When simply referred to as “special figure hold memory number” or “pending memory number”, any one or two of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number It may be pointed to. In addition, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start condition” or “execution condition”. In addition, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start condition”. The first special figure hold information and the second special figure hold information are also simply referred to as “special figure hold information” unless otherwise distinguished.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the lower part of the gaming area of the game board 2 (below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B). The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 forms a big winning opening that changes between a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and an open state in which the game ball can pass (enter). Specifically, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes, for example, a grand prize opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door shown in FIG. (Open state, closed state) is changed.

  As an example, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 closes the grand prize opening door when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, closes the big prize opening, and opens the big prize opening door when the solenoid 82 is in the on state. Open the grand prize opening. A game ball that has passed (entered) through the open winning opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. In other words, winning the prize winning opening occurs by opening the winning prize opening.

  A predetermined number (for example, 12) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the occurrence of winning in the big prize opening (detection of game balls by the count switch 23). The number of winning balls (for example, 12) to be paid out based on the occurrence of winning in the big winning opening is the number of winning balls to be paid out (for example, 3) based on the occurrence of the first starting winning, and the second starting winning is More than the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the occurrence of (for example, 3). That is, it greatly affects whether the state of the special winning opening (open state, closed state) is advantageous to the player. That is, when the grand prize opening is in an open state, more prize balls can be expected than when the grand prize opening is in a closed state. Therefore, when the big prize opening is in an open state, Is very advantageous to the player.

  In addition to or in place of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter), a partially open state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) may be provided.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2. The first special symbol display device 4A includes, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The first special symbol display device 4A displays (variably displays) a special symbol (also referred to as “special symbol”) that is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be identified. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The special symbol (special symbol) variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol (special symbol) variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is “ Also referred to as “second special figure”.
A game executed with variable display of identification information (or variable display of identification information itself) is referred to as a variable display game. In particular, a variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (variable display game for variably displaying the first special symbol) is also referred to as a first special symbol game, and the variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. (Variable display game for variably displaying the second special figure) is also referred to as a second special figure game. Further, when the first special figure game and the second special figure game are not distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “special figure games”.

  The first special symbol display device 4A (the same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B) has a plurality of types of special symbols such as numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". Variable display of special symbols. Each special symbol is given a symbol number corresponding to each special symbol. As an example, each number indicating “0” to “9” is assigned with a symbol number “0” to “9”, and the symbol indicating “−” is assigned a symbol number “10”. That's fine. Note that the special symbols are not limited to those composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns (for example, lighting patterns such as L and E in the alphabet) in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in a 7-segment LED are set in advance, as a special design It may be displayed.

  A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2 (upper portions of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B). . The first hold indicator 25A includes, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the first special figure hold memory number (the hold number of the first special figure game) based on the hold data (first special figure hold information). A first on-hold display is displayed for possible display. For example, the first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified by the number of LEDs to be lit. For example, if the number of holdings of the first special figure game increases by 1 due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the number of lighting is increased by one, and the holding of the first special figure game is established by the establishment of a new first start condition. When the number decreases by one, the number of lighting may be decreased by one.

  The second hold indicator 25B includes, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the second special figure hold memory number (the hold number of the second special figure game) based on the hold data (second special figure hold information). A second on-hold display is displayed for display. For example, the second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified by the number of LEDs to be lit. For example, if the number of holdings of the second special figure game increases by 1 due to the establishment of a new second starting condition, the number of lighting is increased by one, and the holding of the second special figure game is held by the establishment of a new second starting condition When the number decreases by one, the number of lighting may be decreased by one.

  On the left side of the game area on the game board 2, a passing gate 41, a normal symbol display device 20, and a general figure hold display device 25 </ b> C are provided. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by, for example, the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21, if the number of common figure reservations (described later) is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the normal symbol display 20 A normal start condition for executing a general game (to be described later) executed at the above is established.

  The normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The normal symbol display 20 displays (variably displays) variable symbols of ordinary symbols (also referred to as “ordinary symbols” or “ordinary symbols”), which are a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Note that a variable display game that variably displays a normal symbol is also referred to as a general game (or “normal game”). Note that information about a general game in which a general chart start condition is satisfied but a general chart start condition (described later) is not satisfied is stored (held) as on-hold data (general map hold information).

  The general figure hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general figure hold storage number based on the hold data (general hold information) by, for example, the number of LEDs to be lit. The number of stored customary figures is the number of usual-purpose games that are temporarily executed without being executed immediately when a game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Even if the general chart start condition for executing the general game is satisfied by the detection of the game ball by the gate switch 21, the general chart start condition for allowing the start of the general game is not satisfied ( For example, if the previously established ordinary game is being executed), the execution of the ordinary game is put on hold (the ordinary game is waiting to be executed). In other words, the number of usual-pending memories is the number of usual-purpose games that are in a waiting state. The number of stored ordinary maps is decremented by 1 each time one of the ordinary diagram start conditions is satisfied.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images.

  A first effect movable part 352 is provided on the upper part of the image display device 5. The first effect moving part 352 includes a first effect moving part 352L on the left side of FIG. 1 and a first effect moving part 352R on the right side of FIG. (Hereinafter, when referred to as “first effect moving part 352”, it represents one or both of “first effect moving part 352L” and “first effect moving part 352R”.) First effect moving part 352L forms a part of a first effect movable body 303L to be described later. The first effect movable part 352R forms a part of a first effect movable body 303R described later. In the present embodiment, the first effect movable portion 352L is exemplified as the “first accessory”. In addition, the first effect movable unit 352R is exemplified as the “second accessory”. Note that 303L and 303R form part of an accessory 300 described later. Details of the accessory 300 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The first and second actors form a “contact state” in which they are in contact with each other and a “separated state” in which they are separated from each other. Here, the contact state refers to a state in which a part of the first accessory is in contact with a part of the second accessory. In the present embodiment, an example in which a part of the first accessory and a part of the second accessory are in contact with each other and the case where the first effect movable part 352L and the first effect movable part 352R are in contact with each other is illustrated. An example in which a part of the first accessory and a part of the second accessory are in contact with each other is not limited to this. For example, a part of the first effect movable body 303L described later and a part of the first effect movable body 303R may be in contact with each other. Further, the contact state refers to a state in which the first accessory and the second accessory are close to each other compared to separation. Therefore, when the first and second actors are close to each other as compared with the separation, for example, contact is made via a buffer member, or a gap is generated between the first and second actors. Also good.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R linearly move in the horizontal direction in the vicinity of the central part shown in FIG. To do. However, the first combination and the second combination may be separated from each other by a method other than the movement of the first combination and the second combination in the lateral direction. For example, only one of the first accessory and the second accessory may be moved and separated in the horizontal direction. Moreover, you may make it either one or both of a 1st accessory and a 2nd accessory move to an up-down direction, and may isolate | separate. Moreover, you may make it either one or both of a 1st accessory and a 2nd accessory move to the diagonal direction, and may isolate | separate. Furthermore, you may make it a 1st accessory and a 2nd accessory move to a mutually different direction in the left-right direction, an up-down direction, or the diagonal direction, respectively, and may make it isolate | separate.

  The first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R form a specific shape when in a contact state. FIG. 1 shows that the first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R are in contact with each other to form a specific character shape. However, a specific shape may be formed when the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R are in the separated state. In addition to the character shape, the specific shape may be, for example, a character, a pattern, or a figure.

The first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R linearly move in the vertical direction between the upper end position and the lower end position when in contact. In the present embodiment, the upper end position is exemplified as the “first position”. Further, the lower end position is exemplified as the “second position”. FIG. 1 shows that the first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R are at the upper end position, which is the first position.
In the present embodiment, the first position is exemplified as including two positions, “first upper position” and “second upper position” described later. The “second position” is exemplified as a “lower position” to be described later. That is, the first position or the second position may include a plurality of positions.

In the present embodiment, as the case where the first effect movable unit 352L and the first effect movable unit 352R move in the vertical direction while being in contact with each other, the first effect movable unit 352L and the first effect movable unit 352R are moved from the top to the bottom. Although the case where it moves is illustrated, you may make it the 1st effect movable part 352L and the 1st effect movable part 352R move from the bottom to the top. Further, the direction in which the first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R move while contacting is not limited to the vertical direction. For example, the first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R may move in the lateral direction while in contact with each other. Further, the first effect movable part 352L and the first effect movable part 352R may move in an oblique direction while being in contact with each other. Furthermore, the first effect movable unit 352L and the first effect movable unit 352R may move in a curved manner while being in contact with each other. That is, the direction of the force with which the first effect movable unit 352L and the first effect movable unit 352R receive an impact by movement is not limited to the upward direction, and may be any direction such as a downward direction, a lateral direction, and an oblique direction. .
In addition, although the movement of the 1st effect movable part 352L and the 1st effect movable part 352R illustrates the case where it moves by dead weight fall, the movement of the 1st effect movable part 352L and the 1st effect movable part 352R is limited to dead weight fall. Not. For example, it may be moved by a motor or cylinder actuator.

  In addition, although this embodiment demonstrates the case where the 1st effect movable part 352L and the 1st effect movable part 352R move while contacting, the 1st effect movable part 352L and the 1st effect movable part 352R are contacting. In addition to moving, it may be moved individually. For example, the first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R may fall separately under their own weight. That is, the first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R may be able to select the case of falling while being in contact with the case of falling individually, depending on the effect mode.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol display area is arranged. In the decorative symbol display area, an effect is displayed in which decorative symbols, which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified, are variably displayed. Variable display of decoration identification information (decorative symbols) is also included in the variable display game. The image display device 5 is a first special symbol game (a special game using the first special symbol) executed by the first special symbol display device 4A or a second special symbol executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the game (special game using the second special diagram), variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols is executed in the display area (decorative symbol display area).

  As an example, as shown in FIG. 1, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. Corresponding to the start of any special figure game of the first special figure game or the second special figure game, that is, corresponding to the start of fluctuation of any special figure of the first special figure or the second special figure game Then, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbol variation (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. After that, in response to the end of the special symbol game, that is, in response to the special symbol stop display, the decorative symbols (determined decorative symbols, final symbols) that are variable display results in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, respectively. Stop symbol) is also displayed. That is, in the display area (decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R) of the image display device 5, the variation of the ornamental symbol is started in conjunction with (corresponding to) the first special symbol game (or the second special symbol game). Then, the fixed decoration symbol (also referred to as the final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed.

  For example, there are eight kinds of decorative patterns (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8”, Chinese numerals, English characters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, letters, symbols, and character images. The character image may be composed of, for example, a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or a decorative image showing any other figure). Each decorative symbol is assigned a symbol number corresponding to each decorative symbol. As an example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” may be attached to the alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  In addition, the stop display which stops the fixed special symbol which is a variable symbol display result (also referred to as a special symbol display result) and terminates the variable display, and the fixed symbol symbol which is a variable symbol display result (final stop) Stop display to stop the variable display and stop display to stop the variable display by stopping display of the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol (also referred to as the normal figure display result) Also referred to as a complete stop display, a final stop display, or a derived display (or simply “derived”). Note that the variation start timing and variation end timing of the decorative symbol do not necessarily coincide with the variation start timing and variation end timing of the special symbol, and within the variation time of the special symbol (special symbol variation time) It is also possible to keep the fluctuation time within.

  That is, the variation start timing of the decorative symbol may be later than the variation start timing of the special symbol, or the variation end timing of the special symbol (the stop display timing of the confirmed special symbol) It may be later than (stop display timing). For example, the execution of the predetermined effect may be started after the display of the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped, and the final special symbol may be stopped and displayed when the execution of the predetermined effect is completed.

  Further, a stop display different from the complete stop display (final stop display, derived display) may be performed. For example, the decorative design may be temporarily stopped during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative design until the fixed decorative design is derived and displayed. In the temporary stop display, a decorative pattern with a fluctuation speed of “0” is displayed while being stopped, for example, causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction, or shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). It may include something that stops and displays without causing time, slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, a first start prize storage display area 5HL and a second start prize storage display area 5HR are arranged. In the first start winning memory display area 5HL, as in the first hold indicator 25A, the first hold display for displaying the first special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner is performed. That is, the number of the first special figure games that are currently suspended is displayed in an identifiable manner. In the first start winning memory display area 5HL, as in the second hold indicator 25B, the second hold display for displaying the second special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner is performed. In other words, the number of second special figure games that are currently suspended is displayed in an identifiable manner.

  In the first start winning storage display area 5HL, the first hold display may be performed, for example, right-justified. In other words, when the number of holds of the first special figure game increases due to the establishment of a new first start condition, if there is no other first hold display in the first start prize storage display area 5HL, the first start prize storage display A new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the incremented first special figure hold information on the right side of the area 5HL (center side of the display area of the image display device 5), and the first start winning storage display area 5HL If there is another first hold display, the new first hold is displayed on the left side of the other first hold display (the left side of the leftmost first hold display if there are a plurality of other first hold displays). You may make it add a display. In addition, when there are a plurality of first hold indications in the first start winning memory display area 5HL, and the number of holds of the first special figure game decreases due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the first reduced amount is displayed. Delete the first hold display (the first hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the rightmost side of the first start winning memory display area 5HL corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information; Each of the other first hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased first hold display side (right side).

  Further, in the second start winning storage display area 5HR, the second hold display may be performed, for example, left-justified. That is, when the number of second special figure games held increases due to the establishment of a new second start condition, if there is no other second hold display in the second start win memory display area 5HR, the second start win memory display A new second hold display is added to the left side of the area 5HR (the center side of the display area of the image display device 5) as a hold display corresponding to the increased second special figure hold information, and the second start winning storage display area 5HR If there is another second hold display, the new second hold is displayed on the right side of the other second hold display (or on the right side of the rightmost second hold display if there are a plurality of other second hold displays). You may make it add a display.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of second hold indications in the second start winning memory display area 5HR, if the number of holds in the second special figure game is reduced due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the second reduced amount is stored. Delete the second hold display (the second hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the leftmost side of the second start winning memory display area 5HR corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information; Each of the other second hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased second hold display side (left side). Note that the first start prize storage display area 5HL and the second start prize storage display area 5HR are also simply referred to as “start prize storage display area 5H” unless otherwise distinguished.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, in addition to the first start-winning memory display area 5HL and the second start-winning memory display area 5HR, the first start-winning memory display area 5HL and the second as the hold display area. The hold display erased (moved) from the start winning memory display area 5HR (that is, the first special figure hold information digested by the establishment of the first start condition and the second display digested by the establishment of the second start condition) Active display area AHA displaying a special image representing information including active display (also called digestion display, current display) corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display of decorative symbols executed based on the special map hold information (Digestion display area, digestion display area, current hold display area, current hold display area, active hold display area, active hold display area, active display Frequency, time display area, this display area, also referred to as digestion time display.) Is, for example, between a first start winning storage display area 5HL second start winning storage display area 5HR is disposed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the active display area AHA is arranged between the first start-winning memory display area 5HL and the second start-winning memory display area 5HR. The display area AHA only needs to be arranged at any position in the display area of the image display device 5. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to the active display, an active display frame that surrounds the active display, an active display or an active display, or an active display such as a character or an image displayed around the active display frame Information corresponding to the display is displayed by a special image.

  In addition to the above configuration, the game area of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered any of the general prize opening is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). Yes. The stick controller 31A includes an operation stick that the player holds, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). Yes. The trigger button can be operated in a predetermined direction by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) in a state where the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation on the trigger button may be incorporated in the operation rod.

  A tilt direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation pole when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the photo sensor.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). Is provided. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor for detecting the player's operation act on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B.

  An audio output member is provided in the periphery of the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the speaker 8UL and the speaker 8UR are installed at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and the speaker 8LL and the speaker 8LR are installed at the lower left and right oblique parts of the upper plate (the upper left and right oblique parts of the lower plate). It is installed. Hereinafter, the speakers 8UL, 8UR, 8LL, and 8LR will be simply referred to as speakers 8 unless otherwise distinguished. The speaker 8 outputs (reproduces) voice (sound and voice). For example, the speaker 8 outputs a production sound (also referred to as a sound effect) according to the game progress status of the gaming machine 1 and outputs a warning sound according to the status of the gaming machine 1.

  The production sound includes music, detection sound, response sound, notification sound, and the like. The music in the production sound is, for example, BGM, a song, etc. that are output according to the progress of the game. The detection sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, voice (serif, message), or the like that is output in accordance with a detection result by a switch or a sensor (for example, detection of a winning at the first start winning opening, etc.). The response sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound or a voice that is output in response to an operation action on the push button 31B. Since the operation action on the push button 31B is also detected by the push sensor, the response sound output in response to the operation action on the push button 31B is also a detection sound. The notification sound in the production sound is, for example, a sound or voice that is notified to request an operation action on the push button 31B, or a sound, voice, or the like that notifies the shift to the reach state when the reach state (described later) is shifted. Sound, voice, or the like that notifies or suggests that the game will shift to the jackpot gaming state before the transition to the jackpot gaming state.

  An example of the warning sound is a warning sound that is output when the game ball is excessively held (stored) in the lower plate, a warning sound that is output when the glass door (not shown) is open, or the like. .

  A light emitting member (light emitting body) that emits light as an effect or decoration is provided inside and around the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the light emitting member 9CC is installed at the upper position of the image display device 5, the light emitting member 9CL and the light emitting member 9CR are installed at the left and right positions of the image display device 5, and the light emitting member is installed at the upper position of the frame 3 for the gaming machine. The light emitting member 9SL and the light emitting member 9SR are installed on the left and right positions of the frame 3 for the gaming machine 9U. Hereinafter, the light emitting members 9CC, 9CL, 9CR, 9U, 9SL, and 9SR are collectively referred to as a lamp 9 unless particularly distinguished. For example, the lamp 9 may be composed of one or more LEDs, or may be composed of a flash lamp. The light emitting member 9U may be a rotating lamp (for example, a patrol lamp) having a rotating portion. In addition to the above, for example, various light emitting members may be installed around each structure (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7) in the game area.

The image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the like described above are rendering devices that perform rendering, but the gaming machine 1 may include other rendering devices such as a rendering model having a drive unit as the rendering device. Good.
The specific effect described in the present embodiment may be executed by the image display device 5 and other effect devices such as the speaker 8 and the lamp 9.

  In addition, the arrangement position (installation position) of each component is an example, and may be arranged at other positions. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area. Further, for example, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the general-purpose hold indicator 25C may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the general symbol display 20 starts the general game based on the fact that the general diagram start condition is satisfied after the general diagram start condition is satisfied. In the regular game, after the variable display of the normal symbol is started (after the change of the normal symbol is started), the fixed normal symbol which becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol after a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time has elapsed. Is stopped (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is “per standard”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable tulip of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a special game (first special game) is started by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied. A special game (second special game) is started by the second special symbol display device 4B on the basis that the second start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied. In the special figure game, after the variable display of the special symbol is started (after the change of the special symbol is started), when the variable display time as the special figure change time elapses, the fixed special that becomes the variable display result of the special symbol Derives and displays a symbol (special image display result). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as a specific display result, and if a special symbol different from the big bonus symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, “ It will be “losing”. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the “small hit” as the predetermined display result may be used.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as an example, special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” are jackpot symbols, and a special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a jackpot symbol and a lost symbol in the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol.

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state which is a specific gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 executes a round (also referred to as “round game”) advantageous for the player a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds) in the big hit gaming state. The round is the opening cycle of the big prize opening. In addition, after the variable display result in the special game is “small hit”, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the small hit game state which is a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 opens and closes the big prize opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round (each round) after the variable display result in the special game becomes “big hit”, and wins a big prize. The mouth state (open state, closed state) is changed. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 changes the big prize opening from the closed state to the open state at the start of the round, and then changes the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state. In other words, the pachinko machine 1 opens the grand prize opening door at the start of the round and keeps the grand prize opening open, and then closes the grand prize opening door and keeps the grand prize opening closed. End the round.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 changes the big prize opening to the open state once per round (changes the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state during one round). In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the big prize opening to the open state a plurality of times per round. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the grand prize opening to an open state twice per round (during the round, the grand prize opening is open → closed → open → closed) May change with the state). Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the big prize opening to the open state in a short time a plurality of times per round.

  In addition, the grand prize opening is maintained in the closed state instead of the aspect in which the round is started by changing the big prize opening from the closed state to the open state as described above (the aspect in which the grand prize opening door is immediately opened at the start of the round). It may be a mode in which the round starts (a mode in which the grand prize opening door is not opened at the start of the round). That is, the pachinko machine 1 keeps the grand prize opening closed without opening the grand prize opening door at the start of the round, and then opens the grand prize opening door and keeps the grand prize opening open. Alternatively, the grand prize opening door may be closed to end one round.

  The predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds) in which the round is executed in the big hit gaming state may not be a fixed (constant) number of times (for example, always 10 times). For example, the predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds) in which the round is executed in the big hit gaming state is any one selected (lottery) from a plurality of types of times (for example, 2, 8, 16) It may be the number of times.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the jackpot gaming state, the number of executions of the round is the upper limit number (if the predetermined number is a fixed number, the fixed number is selected from a plurality of types. Repeat the round until the selected number of times is reached. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 ends the execution of the round when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has not won a prize winning opening) even before the number of rounds reaches the upper limit. May be.

  In the round, the big prize opening is either a predetermined time (opening period) after opening the big prize opening door, or a predetermined number (for example, nine) of winnings to the big prize opening occurs. It is maintained in an open state until the period until. The predetermined time (open period) during which the prize winning opening is maintained in the round may not be a fixed (constant) time (for example, always 29 seconds). For example, the predetermined time (open period) during which the prize winning opening is maintained in the open state in the round is any one selected (lottery) from a plurality of types of times (for example, 0.1 seconds and 29 seconds). It may be time.

  In the round, the big prize opening is maintained in a closed state (closed state in the round) until a predetermined time (closed period) elapses. For example, in the case of a mode in which the round starts with the grand prize opening being changed from the closed state to the open state, the grand prize opening is until a predetermined time (closing period) has elapsed after the grand prize opening door is closed. Stay closed for a period of time. Further, for example, in the case of a mode in which a round starts with the grand prize opening maintained in a closed state, the big prize opening is in a closed state for a period until a predetermined time (closing period) elapses after the round starts. Maintained. The predetermined time (closing period) during which the grand prize winning opening is kept closed in the round may not be a fixed (constant) time (for example, always 3 seconds). For example, the predetermined time (closing period) during which the grand prize winning opening is maintained closed in the round is any time selected (lottery) from a plurality of types of times (for example, 1 second, 3 seconds). There may be.

  From the above, in the big hit gaming state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes, for example, each round of changing the big prize opening from the open state (29 seconds) to the closed state (3 seconds), or opens the big prize opening. Each round of changing from state (29 seconds) to closed state (3 seconds) is executed 16 times, or the grand prize opening is opened (0.1 seconds) → closed state (1 second) → open state (0.1 Each round that is changed from (second) to closed state (one second) can be executed twice. Also, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the big hit gaming state performs the round of changing the grand prize opening from the open state (29 seconds) to the closed state (3 seconds) eight times and then opens the big prize port (0. It is also possible to execute each round changing from 1 second) to closed state (1 second) eight times.

  Of the rounds in the big hit gaming state, a round with a relatively long predetermined time (opening period) in which the big prize opening is in an open state (for example, a round in which the open state is 29 seconds) is also called a normal open round. A round with a relatively short predetermined time (opening period) for opening the grand prize opening (for example, a round in which the open state is 0.1 second) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

  Of the special symbols that are jackpot symbols, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the normal opening round (the jackpot symbol controlled to the jackpot gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed later) may be referred to as the normal opening round jackpot symbol. . Of the special symbols that are jackpot symbols, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the short-term opening round (the jackpot symbol controlled to the jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed later) may be referred to as the short-term opening round jackpot symbol.

  In the big hit gaming state (normal open big hit state) controlled after the normal open round big hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the normal open round is executed a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). Also, in the big hit gaming state (short term open big hit state) controlled after the short-term open round big hit symbol is derived as a definite special symbol in the special figure game, the short-term open round is executed a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). The If the number of executions of the normal opening round is larger in the normal opening big hit state than the short opening big hit state, the short opening is executed in addition to the normal opening round in the normal opening big hit state. In the big hit state, a normal opening round may be executed in addition to the short-term opening round.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has the value obtained by the player in each jackpot game state as the jackpot game state controlled after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, that is, the game It is possible to prepare (realize) various jackpot gaming states with different degrees of advantage (for example, the number of winning balls (number of balls)) viewed from the player.

  As an example of the case where the short-term free round is not used, the round is advantageous to the player over the jackpot gaming state in which the round (normally open round) is executed eight times and the jackpot gaming state in which the round (normally open round) is executed eight times. A jackpot gaming state in which (normally open round) is executed 16 times can be prepared. In the above example, if there is no difference in the number of times that the winning prize opening is changed to the open state in each round (normally open round) or the time (open time) of each open state, the round (normally open round) is determined. In the big hit gaming state executed 16 times, it is possible to expect twice as many balls as the big hit gaming state executed eight times (normally open round).

  As an example of using short-term open rounds, a jackpot gaming state (actually eight rounds of jackpot gaming state) in which eight short-term open rounds are executed after executing eight regular opening rounds, and a bonus game state of substantial eight rounds. It is possible to prepare a jackpot gaming state in which a normal open round is executed 16 times, which is advantageous to the player. In the above example, there is no difference in the number of times that the big prize opening is changed to the open state in each normal open round and the time (open time) of each open state, and the number of items that can be obtained in the short-term open round If it is so small as to be negligible, in the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed 16 times, it is possible to expect a double play in the big hit gaming state of 8 rounds.

  In the normal open round, even if the predetermined time (opening period) has not elapsed since the opening of the grand prize opening door, if the predetermined number of prizes for the big prize opening occurs, Change to closed state. On the other hand, in the short-term open round, it is difficult to reach a predetermined number of winnings at the big winning opening. Therefore, in the short-term release round, the round does not end before the predetermined release time elapses, and the predetermined release period is substantially secured for the time required for one round in the short-term release round to end. become.

  In addition, as described above, even if the predetermined time (opening period) has not elapsed since the opening of the grand prize opening door, if the predetermined number of winnings to the big prize opening occurs, Although the state changes to the closed state, the value obtained by the player may be varied by providing a difference in the predetermined number. For example, a big hit gaming state in which the above-mentioned predetermined number is set to 5 and the normal opening round (opening time is 29 seconds) is executed 8 times, and the normal opening round (the opening time is 29 seconds) is set to 8 above. A jackpot gaming state in which the normal opening round (opening time is 29 seconds), in which the predetermined number is 10, which is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot gaming state to be executed once, may be prepared.

  Further, the value obtained by the player may be varied by providing a difference in the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the occurrence of winning in the big winning opening. For example, it is more advantageous for the player than the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round with 6 prize balls is executed 16 times and the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round with 6 prize balls is executed 16 times. A big hit gaming state in which a normal open round with 12 award balls is executed 16 times may be prepared.

  Further, in addition to the value obtained by the player by the jackpot gaming state itself (value obtained by the player during the jackpot gaming state), the type of state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 controlled after the jackpot gaming state (for example, , Normal state, time-short state, probability change state) and the period (eg, time-short state, probability change state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 controlled after the big hit game state (for example, the number of time reductions, ST The value obtained by the player after the jackpot gaming state may be varied by varying the number of times).

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled after the 8R probability variable big hit (described later) is set as the big hit gaming state that is controlled after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”. A big hit gaming state in which the normal open round is executed 8 times and a big hit gaming state in which the normal open round controlled after the 16R probability variable big hit (described later) is executed 16 times are prepared.

  In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R arranged in the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the start of one of the special game games, the decorative display variable display is started. In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is a specific variable during the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of the variable display due to the stop display of the confirmed decorative symbol. There may be a predetermined reach state that constitutes a part of the display combination.

  The reach state is a decorative design that is not yet stopped when the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination (also referred to as “reach variation”). Is a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. In the following description, reaching a reach state is also referred to as reach establishment (reach establishment).

  Further, in response to the reach state, the variation speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (an effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Or changing the display mode of the background image, playing and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design, performing a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state May be. Such effect operations such as the display of the character image, the change of the display mode of the background image, the reproduction display of the moving image, and the change of the variation mode of the decorative pattern are referred to as reach effect (or reach effect display). The reach effect includes not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speaker 8 and the light emission operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9 and the like before reaching the reach state. It may be included that the operation mode is different from the operation mode.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the production pattern, the possibility that the jackpot combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed after the reach production may be varied (also referred to as “hit expectation” or “hit reliability”). As a result, the jackpot expectation can be made different depending on which of a plurality of types of reach effects is executed, that is, depending on which reach effect appears. As an example, in the present embodiment, the reach mode of normal reach and the reach mode of super reach that has a higher expectation degree of big hits than normal reach are set (prepared) in advance.

  Note that the degree of expectation of jackpot is, for example, (probability that the effect will be executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of becoming the big hit) / {(probability that the effect will be executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of being the big hit) + (the jackpot (Probability that the effect is executed at times other than time) × (probability of not winning the jackpot)} (when the expectation degree of jackpot is “1”, the variable display result is always “hit”).

  In addition, during the variable display of the decorative design, a slide effect or a pseudo-continuous effect realized by a variable display operation of the decorative design or the like can be executed as one aspect of the variable display effect. In the slide effect, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then a plurality of decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) are displayed. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols at, a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) of the decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” decorative symbol display area) in the temporarily stopped display of the decorative symbols display area 5L and the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, or both), the decorative symbol is changed again, and then the stop symbol is displayed, thereby performing the effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed. Thus, in the slide effect, a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed until a fixed decorative symbol resulting in variable display is derived and displayed after variable display of the decorative symbols is started, and then variable for a predetermined number of decorative symbols. By executing the display again, there are a case where the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state and a case where the decorative symbol constituting the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state.

  In the pseudo-continuous production, in response to the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game is satisfied once, the fixed decoration that becomes a variable display result after the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. Before the symbols are derived and displayed, all of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, a predetermined pseudo-continuous chance is a part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). Or temporarily displayed), in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a re-variable display, which is an effect display for starting variable display of all the decorative symbols, is performed in a predetermined manner. Times (for example, up to 4 times).

  The number of re-variable displays (number of re-variable displays) in the pseudo-continuous effect is the number of variable displays (first variable display) until all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped for the first time in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R ( 1), the number of re-variable displays (final variable display) after all decorative symbols have been temporarily stopped (last time), and the number X of re-variable displays between the first variable display and the last variable display ( X is 0 or 1 or more) and the number of times (X + 1) less than the number of times (X + 2) obtained by adding together. In addition, the number of re-variable display times is the same as the number of times that all decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (the number of temporary stops). The first variable display to the first temporary stop display are also referred to as the first pseudo-continuous, the second variable display (the first re-variable display) to the second temporary stop display are also referred to as the second pseudo-continuous, The third variable display (second revariable display) to the third temporary stop display are also referred to as the third pseudo-ream, and the fourth variable display (third revariable display) to fourth temporary stop display. This is also called the fourth pseudo-ream. Further, the number of pseudo-continuations in the pseudo-continuous production is also referred to as the number of pseudo-series fluctuations (or the number of pseudo-series). That is, the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations, the number of re-variable display times, and the number of temporary stops are the same. The increase in the number of pseudo-continuations such as the first, second, third,... Is also referred to as “the pseudo-continuation continues”.

In the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the re-variable display (re-variation) is performed once to four times, so that the decoration pattern is variable based on the fact that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once. The display can appear as if it were started 2-5 times in a row. In the present embodiment, an example in which the revariable display (revariation) is performed once or twice (see FIG. 5) is shown, but the revariable display (revariation) may be performed three or more times.
Even in the case where a plurality of re-variable displays are performed, the variable display can be performed in the pseudo-series.

  In the pseudo-continuous effect, before reaching reach in the change (before reaching the reach state), the pseudo-continuous chance is temporarily displayed in any or all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. As shown, the decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped, or after reach is established, any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped. The decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped so that the pseudo consecutive chances are temporarily stopped and displayed. That is, the temporary stop display effect mode in the pseudo-continuous effect includes at least an effect mode in which the temporary stop display is performed before the reach state is reached, and an effect mode in which the chance symbol is temporarily stopped after the reach state is reached. May be. The chance symbol can be stopped and displayed even when the reach state is not reached.

  The slip effect (similar to the pseudo-ream effect) is a notice or suggestion to the player that there is a possibility that any reach effect, or a certain reach effect may be executed, or that the degree of expectation of the big hit is high. May be. Hereinafter, an effect for giving a notice or suggestion to a player that there is a possibility that any reach effect or a certain reach effect may be executed or that the degree of expectation of jackpot is high may be collectively referred to as a notice effect. In addition to the slip effect and the pseudo-continuous effect, the notice effect may use a variable display operation different from the slide effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. For example, a background image display, a message window display, etc. There may be those that use an effect operation different from the variable display effect, such as hold display, audio output, and light emission (lighting, blinking, extinguishing). In the notice effect, a plurality of notice effects having different effect operations (effect modes) such as background image display, message window display, hold display, sound output, and light emission are prepared in advance, and one notice effect is selectively provided. It may be executed.

  The notice effect may be executed (started) before the player can determine (actually confirm) whether the notice effect or the content suggested by the notice effect is realized. For example, a notice effect that notifies or suggests to a player that the variable display state of a decorative pattern due to winning a certain game ball may become a reach state has at least a variable display state of the decorative pattern due to winning the game ball. What is necessary is just to be executed (started) before entering the reach state (or the non-reach state). In addition, the notice effect that notifies or suggests to the player that the variable display result due to winning of a certain game ball may be a “hit” is because at least the confirmed decorative pattern due to winning of the game ball is stopped and displayed May be executed (started) before.

  It is sufficient for the notice effect to include a pre-read notice effect (also referred to as “pre-judgment notice effect”). The pre-reading notice effect determines whether or not the variable display results in a “big hit” based on the hold information of the special-purpose game before starting the variable display subject to the notice. (Prefetching) is a notice effect to be executed based on the determination result. In the following description, the hold information that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect is referred to as target hold information, and the first hold display corresponding to the target hold information is referred to as the target first hold display and corresponds to the target hold information. The second hold display to be performed is referred to as a target second hold display, and the variable display corresponding to the target hold information is also referred to as a target variable display. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect is executed during the digestion of the target hold information (when the target hold information including the variable display of the target is being digested) and before the target hold information. There are a case where it is executed during digestion of the hold information and a case where it is executed during digestion of the hold information of the target and during the digestion of the hold information before the target hold information.

  The stage action that becomes a pre-reading notice effect by winning a certain game ball is that the player determines whether or not the content of the pre-reading notice effect is realized after winning the game ball (after the start condition is established). It may be executed (started) before it can be determined. For example, a stage action that is a pre-reading advance notice for informing (indicating) to a player that there is a possibility of reaching a reach state due to a winning of a certain game ball is at least a decorative pattern by winning of the game ball. Any variable display state may be executed (started) before the reach state (or non-reach state) is reached. In addition, at least a play operation of a pre-reading notice effect for informing (suggesting) a player that a variable display result may be a “hit” by winning a game ball What is necessary is just to be executed (started) before the winning decorative symbol by winning is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, as a pre-reading notice effect (preliminary notice effect), a hold effect according to the display mode of the first hold display in the first start prize storage display area 5HL and the second hold display in the second start prize storage display area 5HR is prepared. It may be. The holding effect includes a first hold display added to the first start winning memory display area 5HL when the first start winning occurs, and a second hold display added to the second start winning memory display area 5HR when the second start winning occurs. Are displayed in a notice mode (addition effect at the time of addition), and the already displayed first hold display and second hold display are changed to a notice mode (including a change from one notice mode to another notice mode). , And the like), an effect that is executed when the first hold display or the second hold display changes to the notice mode, and the character or the like is directly displayed on the display in the display area of the image display device 5. Effect that is acted on or indirectly (holding action effect), or an effect that is executed when the first hold display or the second hold display does not change to the notice mode, and the character or the like is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 on hold Shown directly or indirectly effect to act on (hold action Gase effect) may be included, such as. When the hold action effect is executed, the display mode of the first hold display (or second hold display) that is the target of action changes, but when the hold action effect effect is executed, the first hold display (or The display mode of (second hold display) does not change.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is not changed to the reach state after the variable symbol variable display is started. In addition, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is reached after the variable symbol variable display starts. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  In the present embodiment, a special symbol indicating the number “3” among the special symbols (special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7”) as the big hit symbol as the confirmed special symbols in the special symbol game. When the symbol or the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed, it becomes “8R (round) probability variation big hit” which is one mode of “big hit”. Further, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, “16R probability variable big hit” which is one mode of “big hit” is obtained. The round that is controlled when the 8R probability variable big hit is a normally open round. That is, in the present embodiment, the special symbol indicating the numbers “3” and “5” is a normal open round jackpot symbol. The round controlled when the 16R probability variation big hit is a normally open round. That is, in this embodiment, the special symbol indicating the number “7” is a normal open round jackpot symbol.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed, it is 8R probability variation big hit, but when the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed. It may be set to “2R probability variation big hit (also referred to as“ surprise accuracy ”)” in which a short-term opening round is executed. In this case, the special symbol indicating the number “5” is a short-term open round jackpot symbol. In the “big hit”, “8R probability variation big hit”, “16R probability variation big hit”, and “2R probability variation big hit” are called “big hit types”.

  In the case of 16R probable big hit, specifically, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the reach state is reached, and a predetermined reach effect is achieved. After being executed, the definite decorative symbol that is a big hit combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed. An example of the jackpot combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot is the same decorative pattern having an odd number of symbols on a predetermined effective line (for example, a straight line on the side) formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Are arranged in three (ie, “1”, “1”, “1”, “3”, “3”, “3”, “5”, “5”, “ 5 ”,“ 7 ”,“ 7 ”,“ 7 ”).

  In the case of 8R probability variation big hit, specifically, when the special symbol indicating the number “3” or the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. After reaching the reach state and executing a predetermined reach effect, the definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot is stopped and displayed. An example of the jackpot combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot is a pattern in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged on a predetermined effective line formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In other words, “2”, “2”, “2”, “4”, “4”, “4”, “6”, “6”, “6”, “8”, “8”, and “8”).

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit is not provided. However, when the 2R probability variation big hit is provided, if the 2R probability variation big hit is achieved, the decorative symbol variable display is started and the reach state is reached and a predetermined reach effect is achieved. After being executed, or without being in a reach state, it is only necessary to stop and display a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation jackpot. An example of the jackpot combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation jackpot is a different decorative symbol (one of at least three symbols) on a predetermined effective line formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. 3 decorative patterns (for example, “1”, “3”, “5”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “5”, “5”, “7”) ”) Or a combination of decorative symbols including a chance symbol or the like (for example, a combination of“ 1 ”,“ accuracy ”,“ 2 ”, where“ accuracy ”is an example of a chance symbol).

  In the special figure game, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit combination corresponding to the 16R probability changing big hit is stopped and the 8R probability changing on the surface. There may be a case where a fixed decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed.

  Based on the fact that the 16R probability variable big hit is reached, the normal open round is controlled to the normal open big hit state in which 16 rounds are executed, and after that, the time-varying control (time reduction control) and the probability variable control (probability fluctuation control) are performed. ) Is performed. Further, based on the fact that the 8R probability variable big hit has been reached, the normal open round is controlled to a normal open big hit state in which the normal open round is executed eight times (rounds), and after that, the probability change control is performed together with the time reduction control.

  By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result is “big hit” in each special figure game is improved to be higher than that in the normal state. Probability change control is a condition in which a special game of a predetermined number of STs (also referred to as a probability change number) is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state, or when the variable display result is “big hit”. End when is established first. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become “big hit” when the probability variation control is being performed, the probability variation control is not performed if the special game of the predetermined number of ST times (number of probability variation) is digested. finish. The predetermined number of STs is, for example, 70 times. The normal state is a normal game state different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state. The same control as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the state in which the initialization process is executed after power-on as in the case where the system reset is performed) is performed.

  In addition, by performing the time-saving control, the special symbol variable display time (special symbol variation time) in the special symbol game is shortened compared to the normal state. Time-shortening control is performed when either of a predetermined time-saving special-purpose game is executed and the variable display result is “hit” after the end of the jackpot gaming state. To finish. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become “big hit” when the time-shortening control is being performed, the time-shortening control is ended when the predetermined time-saving special game is consumed. Note that the predetermined number of time reductions is, for example, 70 times.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control is made to the normally open big hit state based on the fact that the 8R probability variation big hit or the 16R probability variation big hit has been reached, and the probability variation control for a predetermined number of STs (for example, 70 times) is completed after the end. Is performed, and time reduction control is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times).

  In this embodiment, the number of time reductions after the big hit (8R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit) and the ST number (number of probability variation) are the same (both 70 times), but the big hit (8R probability variation big hit, 16R). The number of time reductions after the probability variation big hit) may be different from the ST number (the number of probability variation). In this embodiment, the number of STs after the 8R probability variation big hit (the number of probability variation) and the number of STs after the 16R probability variation big hit (the number of probability variation) are the same (both 70 times). The number of STs after the big hit (the number of probability variation) may be different from the number of STs after the 16R probability variation big hit (the number of probability variation). Further, in this embodiment, the number of time reductions after the 8R probability variation big hit is the same (both 70 times) after the 16R probability variation big hit, but the number of time reductions after the 8R probability variation big hit. And the short time after the 16R probability variation big hit may be different. In the following description, a big hit gaming state, a state in which probability variation control is performed, a state in which time reduction control is performed, and the like may be referred to as advantageous states.

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variable big hit is not provided. However, when the 2R probability variable big hit is provided, the short-term open big hit is executed based on the fact that the 2R probability variable big hit is performed. After the completion of the control, the probability variation control may be performed together with the time-shortening control as in the case of 16R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit.

  In the present embodiment, even when the variable display result does not become “big hit” when probability variation control is being performed, when a special game with a predetermined number of STs (probability variation number) is consumed. Although the probability variation control ends, the probability variation control may not be terminated until the variable display result becomes “big hit” without providing the ST count (number of probability variation). In such a mode, as a mode of “big hit”, it is good to provide a normal big hit that is not subjected to probability variation control after the end. For example, when an 8R normal big hit is provided, based on the fact that the 8R normal big hit is achieved, the normal open round is controlled to a normal open big hit state in which eight rounds are executed. (Time reduction control may or may not be performed).

  In addition, even if the probability variation control is ended when the probability variation control is ended by the probability variation control lottery executed every time the special game is started after the big hit gaming state is ended, the probability variation control is terminated. Good. In such an embodiment, after the special game with the predetermined number of STs (the probability of change) is not digested until the special game with the predetermined number of STs (the number of changes with certainty) is exhausted, A probabilistic falling lottery may be performed in each game. The same applies to the time reduction control.

  When the time reduction control is performed, the normal symbol display unit 20 uses the normal symbol display unit 20 to make the normal symbol change time (normal symbol change time) shorter than that in the normal state, or to change the normal symbol in each time the normal symbol game. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure”. The game ball can easily pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state, and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the start condition is satisfied. In this way, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in accordance with the time-shortening control and is advantageous to the player is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined.

  By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the second special figure game can be executed frequently, so that the variable display result Is reduced to become a “big hit”. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed.

  A gaming state in which both the short time control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a short time state or a high base state. The gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a probability variation state or a high probability state. A gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is also referred to as a high probability high base state. The probability variation state in which only the probability variation control is performed and the short time control or the high opening control is not performed is also referred to as a high probability low base state. It should be noted that only the gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is sometimes referred to as a “probability variation state”, and may be referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from the high probability low base state. On the other hand, a probability variation state (high probability low base state) in which only time variation control is performed and time reduction control or high opening control is not performed is sometimes referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from a high accuracy high base state. The short time state in which the short time control or the high opening control is performed without performing the probability variation control is also referred to as a low probability high base state. The normal state in which neither the probability variation control, the time reduction control, nor the high opening control is performed is also referred to as a low probability low base state. When at least one of the time reduction control and the probability change control is performed in a game state other than the normal state, the special game (second special game) can be frequently executed, and each special game (first special game) The probability that the variable display result in the figure game or the second special figure game will be a “big hit” is increased, which is advantageous to the player. A gaming state advantageous to a player different from the big hit gaming state is also referred to as a special gaming state.

  A re-lottery effect may be executed for a decorative pattern. For example, as a re-lottery effect, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, after temporarily displaying a decorative symbol that is a big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation big hit, the variation is changed again with the same decorative symbols aligned. , Any one of the decorative symbols corresponding to the big hit combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit and the decorative symbols corresponding to the big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variable big hit may be finally stopped and displayed as the confirmed decorative symbols.

In addition, after the definite decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variable big win is derived and displayed, the period until the end of the eighth round (or after the end of the eighth round, the next variable display game is executed). In the period until it is started, a round-number promotion effect for notifying that the jackpot is a 16R probability variable jackpot may be executed.
In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit is not provided. However, when the 2R probability variation big hit is provided, the same applies to the case where a definite decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation big hit is derived and displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the normal big hit is not provided, but after the fixed decorative symbol that is the big hit combination corresponding to the normal big win is derived and displayed when the normal big hit is provided, the period until the final round ends ( Or, after the end of the final round, during the period until the next variable display game is started), a probability variation promotion effect that informs that the jackpot is a probability variation jackpot may be executed.

  In addition, the promotion effect (round number promotion effect, probability change promotion effect) executed during the round is referred to as jackpot medium promotion effect (bonus medium number of rounds promotion effect, jackpot medium chance change promotion effect), and after the final round ends The promotion effect (round number promotion effect, probability change promotion effect) to be executed may be referred to as an ending promotion effect (ending round number promotion effect, ending probability change promotion effect).

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of predetermined identification information, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control.

  The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the lamp. Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electrical component for rendering such as 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 is an electrical component for effects such as display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speaker 8, and all or part of the on / off operation in the lamp 9. Is provided with a function of determining the control content for causing a predetermined performance operation to be executed.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speaker 8 based on a command, control data, etc. from the effect control board 12. A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and performs lighting / extinguishing driving in the lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. The lamp driver circuit to perform is installed.

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. If it is. In addition to the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, the gaming machine 1 similarly has other switches (for example, a glass door (not shown) connected to the main board 11. ), A switch for detecting the open / closed state of the game board 2 itself, a switch for detecting unauthorized vibrations, and a switch for detecting unauthorized electromagnetic waves. In addition, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 25A, a second hold display device 25B, and a general drawing hold display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 3A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for designating start of change in the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command that specifies the start of change in the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative symbol variably displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the determination result of whether the variable display result is “losing”, “16R-probable big hit” or “8R-probable big hit” or the type of jackpot Different EXT data is set according to the determination result.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating a confirmed ornament symbol (final stop symbol) in each ornament symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as “fanfare command”) for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the big winning opening is opened to notify that the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state. Command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “16”) in the normal opening big hit state or the short-term opening big hit state. Is set.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the first start prize is generated when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start prize port formed by the normal prize ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A. This is a first start opening prize designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the first special figure game by the symbol display device 4A is satisfied.

  The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and the second start winning is generated. This is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number so that the first special figure reserved memory number can be specified in the first start winning memory display area 5HL or the like. . The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in the second start winning memory display area 5HR or the like.

  For example, the command transmitted as the on-hold storage information may be a first start opening prize specifying command or a second starting opening prize specifying for specifying whether the first start winning opening is a start winning or the second starting winning opening. A command is transmitted, and a first reserved memory number notification command and a second reserved memory number notification command for specifying the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number are transmitted. It should be noted that when the number of reserved memories increases, a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second one) indicating that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has increased. When the reserved memory count decreases, the reserved memory count addition designation command (the second reserved figure count designation command) indicates that the first special figure reserved memory count or the second special figure reserved memory count has decreased. 1 reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  Instead of the first pending storage number notification command and the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying the total pending storage number may be transmitted. Further, a total pending storage number addition designation command (total pending storage number subtraction designation command) for notifying an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number may be transmitted.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating a determination result as to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” and a determination result of the big hit type as the winning determination result. The command C6XXH is a variation category command that indicates a determination result of a variation category (also referred to as “variation pattern type”) as a winning determination result. The variation category is a name when the variation patterns of decorative symbols are classified (aggregated) by type. In other words, the variation category is a group name of each group including a variation pattern of one or more decorative symbols categorized into a common group.

  In the present embodiment, in the winning random number determination process (FIG. 15A), the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result when the start winning is generated. If it is determined as “big hit”, the type of jackpot is determined based on the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the variation category (based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation category) is determined. Fluctuation pattern type) is determined. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the symbol designating command and the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control board 12 is performed. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 can recognize whether or not the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” based on the value set in the symbol designation command and the big hit type, The variable category can be recognized based on the value set in the category command.

  The effect control commands such as the change pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are used when the effect control CPU 120 controls one or more effect devices (image display device 5, speaker 8, lamp 9, etc.). . Hereinafter, an effect control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5 is a display control command, an effect control command used for controlling audio output from the speaker 8 is an audio control command, and a light emission operation of the lamp 9 ( The effect control command used for controlling the lighting operation, blinking operation, and extinguishing operation is also referred to as a lamp control command. Note that, among the effect control commands, there may be a display control command, a voice control command, and a lamp control command.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numerical data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 for performing the operation and an input / output port (I / O) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data in the RAM 102, temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores various fluctuation data in the RAM 102. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, on the main board 11 side, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation category, Numeric data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the display result and the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR5. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted.

  Next, the decorative pattern variation pattern will be described. Hereinafter, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” is referred to as “losing variation pattern”. The loss variation pattern includes a “non-reach variation pattern” (“non-reach loss variation pattern”, “non-reach” corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” among the cases where the variable display result is “loss”. (Also referred to as “(loss) variation pattern”) ”or“ reach variation pattern ”(“ reach loss variation pattern ”) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is“ reach ”among the cases where the variable display result is“ losing ”. Also referred to as).

  A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as a “hit variation pattern”. The hit fluctuation pattern includes a “big hit fluctuation pattern” corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and a “small hit fluctuation pattern” corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit”. Also good. As the big hit variation pattern, a plurality of fluctuation patterns corresponding to each of the big hit types may be prepared.

  Non-reach variation patterns are prepared for multiple variation patterns with different variation times, corresponding to time-short control executed when the total number of reserved memories is large, or when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state or the short-time state. Good. As a result, any variation pattern is selected according to the total number of reserved memories and the gaming state, thereby enabling control to shorten the variation time according to the total number of reserved memories and the gaming state.

  For variation patterns including a reach effect such as a big hit variation pattern and a reach variation pattern, a variation pattern corresponding to the reach mode of each reach effect is prepared. Note that the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed is referred to as “normal reach fluctuation pattern”, and the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach is executed is referred to as “super reach fluctuation pattern”.

  FIG. 5 shows a specific example of the variation category and the variation pattern in the present embodiment. In FIG. 5, the variation category “PA1” is a shortened / non-reach (loss) variation category. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belongs to the variation category “PA1”. The fluctuation category “PA2” is a non-reach (losing) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-3” belong to the variation category “PA2”. The fluctuation category “PA3” is a normal reach (losing) fluctuation category. The variation categories “PA3-1” and “PA3-2” belong to the variation category “PA3”. The fluctuation category “PA4” is a super reach α (losing) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-4” belong to the variation category “PA4”. The fluctuation category “PA5” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-4” belong to the variation category “PA5”. The fluctuation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PB3-1” and “PB3-2” belong to the variation category “PB3”. The fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-4” belong to the variation category “PB4”. The fluctuation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-4” belong to the variation category “PB5”.

  The variation pattern “PA2-1” belonging to the variation category “PA2” is a non-reach variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The variation pattern “PA2-2” is a non-reach variation pattern in which a slip effect is executed. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-2” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the slip effect is executed. The same applies to other fluctuation patterns in which a slip effect is executed. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is a non-reach (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belonging to the variation category “PA1” is a non-reach variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter than the variation pattern “PA2-1”.

The variation pattern “PA3-1” belonging to the variation category “PA3” is a normal reach variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA3-2” is a normal reach (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PA4-1” belonging to the variation category “PA4” is a super reach α (lost) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-2” is a super reach α (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA4-2” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA4-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed as a gas.
The fluctuation pattern “PA4-3” is a super reach α (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (production) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-4” is a super reach α (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The variation pattern “PA5-1” belonging to the variation category “PA5” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-2” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-3” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-4” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The fluctuation pattern “PB3-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB3” is a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PB3-2” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-2” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-3” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The fluctuation pattern “PB5-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-2” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-3” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PB5-4” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit (rush accuracy) is not provided, but when the 2R probability variation big hit (rush accuracy) is provided, the variation categories “PC1”, “PC2”, “PC3” for the 2R probability variation big hit (rush accuracy) are provided. May be provided. Variation patterns “PC1-1” to “PC1-3” belong to the variation category “PC1”. The fluctuation pattern “PC1-1” is a non-reach (surprising) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PC1-2” is a non-reach (accuracy) fluctuation pattern in which a slip effect is executed. The variation pattern “PC1-3” is a non-reach (probability) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once.

  The variation patterns “PC2-1” to “PC2-4” belong to the variation category “PC2”. The fluctuation pattern “PC2-1” is a super reach α (surprise) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PC2-2” is a super reach α (surprise) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The variation pattern “PC2-3” is a super reach α (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PC2-4” is a super reach α (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (production) is executed twice.

  Variation patterns “PC3-1” to “PC3-4” belong to the variation category “PC3”. The fluctuation pattern “PC3-1” is a super reach β (surprise) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PC3-2” is a super reach β (surprise) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The variation pattern “PC3-3” is a super reach β (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PC3-4” is a super reach β (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (production) is executed twice.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. In addition, the ROM 101 stores data (for example, information for specifying the contents of the control command) constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals to be various control commands from the main board 11, The data constituting the table is stored.

  FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 6, for example, a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result in the first special symbol game (the special symbol game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A is derived and displayed. In order to determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state with the variable display result as “big hit (16R probability change big hit, 8R probability change big hit)” based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. It is a table that is referred to. Further, the display result determination table 130A is displayed before the definite special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in the second special symbol game (the special symbol game using the second special symbol) by the second special symbol display device 4B. The variable display result is referred to as “big hit (16R probability change big hit, 8R probability change big hit)” to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. It is a table.

  In the display result determination table 130A, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “big hit (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit) ”And“ Lose ”are assigned to special map display results. Specifically, in the display result determination table 130A, a numerical value (determination) to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result depending on whether the low probability low base state or the high probability high base state is set. Value) is assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” or “losing”.

  In the display result determination table 130A, when the gaming state is the high probability high base state, more determined values are assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” than when the gaming state is the low probability low base state. ing. Specifically, in the low probability low base state, a predetermined number (specifically, 190) of determined values (values in the range of “8000” to “8189”) are assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit”. Yes. On the other hand, in the high-accuracy and high-base state, more than the predetermined number (specifically, 819) of the determined values “8000” to “8818” are assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit”. With such a setting, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is “big hit” compared to the normal state or the short time state (low probability state). As a result, the probability of being determined to be controlled to the big hit gaming state becomes high.

  Note that different display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure. In the first special figure display result determination table for the first special figure, the special figure display result of “small hit” has a predetermined range. In the second special figure display result determination table for the second special figure, a special figure display result in which the predetermined value in the predetermined range is smaller than the first special figure display result determination table is “small hit”. May be assigned. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid frequent occurrence of “small hits” in a gaming state in which a game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B.

  FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. This is a table to be referred to. In the big hit type determination table 131, the first special symbol game (special game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A is executed, or the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Depending on whether or not (special game using the second special figure) is executed, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is the big hit type (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation) Jackpot).

  In the setting example of the big hit type determination table 131, when the game is the first special figure game, that is, when the special figure to be changed (also referred to as a fluctuation special figure) is the first special figure, a predetermined number (specifically, 50) determined values (values in the range of “0” to “49”) are assigned to 16R probability variation big hits. On the other hand, in the case of the second special figure game, that is, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the determined values (“0” to “0”) more than the predetermined number (specifically, 80). 79 ”) is assigned to the 16R probability variation jackpot. With such a setting, in the second special figure game, the 16R probability variation big hit is more likely than in the first special figure. In the high-accuracy and high-base state (specifically, up to the 70th rotation after the end of the big hit), it is possible to enhance the expectation that the 16R-probable big hit will be achieved.

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit (crash probability) is not provided. However, in the case of providing the 2R probability variation big hit (crash probability), in the case of the second special figure game, compared to the case of the first special figure game. A small number of determined values may be assigned to the 2R probability variation big hit (surprise). With such a setting, in the second special figure game, 2R probability variation big hit (crash probability) is less likely than in the first special figure, so that the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. In the gaming state, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of 2R probability variation big hit (crash probability), which makes it difficult to obtain a prize ball, and to prevent a decrease in gaming interest by extending the game.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation category determination table that is referred to in order to determine the variation category as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables having different types of variation categories that can be determined in the variation category determination table and different determination ratios. In the variation category determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number MR3 for determining the variation category is assigned to each variation category. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables having different determined values (for example, the range and number of determined values) assigned to at least one variation category among a plurality of types of variation categories. Yes. Instead of a plurality of variation category determination tables, one large variation category determination table including information on all the variation category determination tables may be stored in the ROM 101.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables having different types of variation patterns that can be determined in the variation pattern determination table, different determination ratios, and the like. In the variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the variation pattern determination random value MR5 is assigned to each variation pattern. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables having different determination values (for example, a range or number of determination values) assigned to at least one variation pattern among a plurality of types of variation patterns. Yes. Note that one large variation pattern determination table including information of each variation pattern determination table may be stored in the ROM 101 instead of the plurality of variation pattern determination tables.

  The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). The In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data (for example, a special figure) Process flags). Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  In such a RAM 102, for example, a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 8 is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 8 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a general figure hold storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game. A control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure storage unit 151A is a special game (not yet started) even though the game ball has passed (entered) through the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first starting winning is generated. Hold data (first special figure hold information) of the first special figure game) by the first special symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates a reservation number with a winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and a random number is generated by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as the hold data (first special figure hold information) until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B is a special game that has not yet started, although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B and a second start winning has occurred. Hold data (second special figure hold information) of (second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B associates a holding number with a winning order (game ball detection order) to the second start winning opening, and makes a random number by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as the hold data (second special figure hold information) until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The first special symbol game hold data (first special figure hold information based on the establishment of the first start condition) by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The hold data (second special figure hold information based on the establishment of the second start winning prize) may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit.

  The general-purpose hold storage unit 151C stores on-hold data related to a general-purpose game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display device 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Information). For example, the universal figure storage unit 151C determines the common figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls in association with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed the passing gate 41. For example, numerical data indicating the random number MR4 is stored as hold data (ordinary hold information) until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. As a specific example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value, data indicating an on state or an off state, and the like for each of a probability variation flag and a time reduction flag.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores the first reserved memory number count value and the second special figure reserved memory number, which are stored values of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the first special figure reserved memory number. The second reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting, the total reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number, etc. Remembered. The game control counter setting unit 154 also stores a variation count value that is a stored value of a variation counter for counting one or both of the ST count (probable variation count) and the short time count.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  A wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating an effect image for the image display device 5 and an information signal (effect sound signal) indicating a command for the audio control board 13 are transmitted to the effect control board 12. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (electric decoration signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 14 and the like are connected. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the user's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected. Further, the effect control board 12 may be connected to a wiring for transmitting from the cross key an operation detection signal indicating that the player's operation action on the cross key (not shown) is detected.

  The effect control board 12 is connected to a first effect motor 310, a first effect solenoid 316, a second effect solenoid 341, and a second effect motor. The first effect motor 310, the first effect solenoid 316, the second effect solenoid 341, and the second effect motor are actuators for moving the first effect movable portion 352.

  The first effect motor 310 is an actuator for moving the first effect movable part 352 upward. In the present embodiment, the first effect movable part 352 moves (rises or descends) in the vertical direction. The first effect movable unit 352 uses the driving force of the first effect motor 310 when ascending, and causes its own weight to fall when descending. Accordingly, it is only necessary that the first effect motor 310 can be controlled to be turned ON / OFF so as to rotate only in one direction.

  The first effect solenoid 316 is an actuator for separating the drive of the first effect motor 310 and the first effect movable unit 352. Specifically, the gear attached to the first effect motor 310 and the gear attached to the first effect movable part 352 are separated, and the rotational force of the gear attached to the first effect motor 310 is the first effect. It is not transmitted to the gear attached to the movable part 352. The first effect solenoid 316 is controlled to separate the drive of the first effect motor 310 and the first effect movable part 352 when the first effect movable part 352 is dropped by its own weight.

  The second effect solenoid 341 is an actuator for dropping the first effect movable part 352 by its own weight. Specifically, the second effect solenoid 341 is moved to move the holding member that holds the first effect moving part 352, and the holding of the first effect moving part 352 is released. The first effect movable unit 352 whose holding has been released falls due to its own weight.

The second effect motor is an actuator for moving the first effect movable unit 352L and the first effect movable unit 352R from the contact state to the separated state and from the separated state to the contact state. The second effect motor is controlled to maintain the first effect movable unit 352L and the first effect movable unit 352R in a contact state when the first effect movable unit 352 moves up and down.
Details of the operations of the first effect motor 310, the first effect solenoid 316, the second effect solenoid 341, and the second effect motor will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  Specifically, the ROM 121 stores various tables for executing the hold effect. For example, the ROM 121 has any one of a plurality of types of display modes of the first hold display displayed in the first start-winning storage display area 5HL as a table for executing the hold effect at the time of addition of the first hold display. The 1st hold | maintenance display mode determination table referred in order to determine may be stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of first hold display mode determination tables that are different from each other in the types of display modes that can be determined in the first hold display mode determination table and the respective determination ratios. . Each first hold display mode determination table includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the display mode of the first hold display at the time of addition for each display mode of the first hold display. ) May be assigned. Instead of the plurality of first hold display mode determination tables, one large first hold display mode determination table including information of all the first hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121. Similarly, in the ROM 121, any one of a plurality of types of display modes of the second hold display displayed in the second start-winning storage display area 5HR as a table for executing the hold effect at the time of addition of the first hold display is displayed. A second hold display mode determination table that is referred to to determine whether or not may be stored.

  Further, in the ROM 121, as a table relating to execution of the hold change effect of the first hold display, whether the display mode of the first hold display already displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL is changed to another display mode. In order to determine which display mode to change to the first pending change presence / absence determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to change to another display mode. A first hold change mode determination table to be referred to may be stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 includes a plurality of first hold change presence / absence determination tables having different determination ratios that change to another display mode and no change to another display mode, and the first hold change mode determination. A plurality of first pending change mode determination tables may be stored in which the types of display modes that can be determined in the table and the respective determination ratios are different from each other. Each first pending change presence / absence determination table may be assigned a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining whether there is a change or not. In each of the first hold change mode determination tables, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (not shown) for determining the display mode of the first hold display after the change is displayed for each display mode of the first hold display. ) May be assigned. Instead of a plurality of first hold change presence / absence determination tables, one large first hold change presence / absence determination table including information of all the first hold change presence / absence determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121. Further, instead of the plurality of first hold change mode determination tables, one large first hold change mode determination table including information of all the first hold change mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121. Similarly, the ROM 121 changes the display mode of the second hold display already displayed in the second start winning storage display area 5HR to another display mode as a table related to the execution of the hold change effect of the second hold display. To determine whether to change to a second pending change presence / absence determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to change to another display mode, or to change to another display mode The 2nd pending | holding change aspect determination table referred to may be memorize | stored.

  The ROM 121 stores a first hold change effect execution timing determination table that is referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the hold change effect of the first hold display (timing such as the number of changes to be executed later). May be. Specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of first hold change effect execution timing determination tables that are different from each other in the type of execution timing that can be determined in the first hold change effect execution timing determination table. It may be. In each first hold change effect execution timing determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the first hold change effect is assigned to each execution timing. Just do it. Further, instead of the plurality of first hold change effect execution timing determination tables, one large first hold change effect execution timing determination table including information of all the first hold change effect execution timing determination tables is stored in the ROM 121. Also good. Similarly, the ROM 121 has a second hold change effect execution timing determination table that is referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the hold change effect of the second hold display (timing of how many changes will be executed later). It may be stored.

  Note that a table including information on two or more of the first hold display mode determination table, the first hold change presence / absence determination table, the first hold change mode determination table, and the first hold change effect execution timing determination table is a ROM 121. May be stored.

  Further, in the ROM 121, when it is determined that the display mode of the first hold display (or the second hold display) is changed to another display mode, the character or the like is directly displayed on the first hold display (or the second hold display). As a table related to the holding action effect to be applied indirectly or indirectly, an action effect execution presence / absence determination table referred to for determining whether or not to execute the holding action effect may be stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of action effect execution presence / absence determination tables with different determination ratios of execution and non-execution. In each action effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for execution presence / absence determination may be assigned to each of execution and non-execution. Further, when there are a plurality of effect modes of the holding action effect, when it is determined that the holding action effect is to be executed, the holding action effect effect that is referred to in order to determine which effect mode is selected from among the plurality of effect modes. The mode determination table may be stored in the ROM 121. Specifically, a plurality of hold action effect effect mode determination tables that are different from each other in the type of hold action effect effect modes that can be determined in the hold effect effect effect mode determination table and the respective determination ratios may be stored. . In each hold action effect effect mode determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the effect mode of the hold effect effect may be assigned to each effect mode.

  Further, in the ROM 121, when it is determined that the display mode of the first hold display (or second hold display) is not changed to another display mode, the character or the like is directly displayed on the first hold display (or second hold display). Alternatively, a table for determining whether or not to execute the holding action gaze effect may be stored as a table relating to the holding action gaze effect that is applied indirectly or indirectly. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of action / gase effect execution presence / absence determination tables with different determination ratios of execution and non-execution. In each action gaze effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for execution presence / absence determination may be assigned to each of execution and non-execution. In addition, when there are a plurality of presentation modes of the holding action gaze effect, the holding action that is referred to in order to determine which of the plurality of presentation modes is determined when it is determined to execute the holding action gasse effect. A gasse effect effect mode determination table may be stored in the ROM 121. Specifically, there are stored a plurality of hold action gaze effect effect mode determination tables that are different from each other in the type of effect mode of the hold action gaze effect that can be determined in the hold action gaze effect effect mode determination table. May be. Even if each holding mode has a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the holding mode effect production mode, each of the production modes is assigned to the respective holding mode gaze production production mode determination table. Good.

  In addition, when executing an active display change effect (described later) for changing a special image including an active display, the ROM 121 determines whether to execute the active display change effect as a table relating to the active display change effect. Therefore, an active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table to be referred to may be stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of active display change effect execution presence / absence determination tables with different determination ratios of execution and non-execution. Each active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table may be assigned a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for execution presence / absence determination, with and without execution. Further, when there are a plurality of active display change effects, when the active display change effect is determined to be executed, the active display referred to determine which of the plurality of effects is selected. You may memorize | store the change production production | presentation aspect determination table in ROM121. Specifically, a plurality of active display change effect effect mode determination tables are stored in which the types of active display change effect effect modes that can be determined in the active display change effect effect mode determination table are different from each other. May be. Each active display change effect presentation mode determination table has a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (not shown) for determining the display mode of the active display change effect assigned to each of the effect modes. Good.

  The active display change effect is an effect that changes the special image to the notice mode. In other words, the active display, the active display frame surrounding the active display, and information corresponding to the active display (for example, characters or images displayed around the active display or the active display frame) It is a production that changes. Note that there may be a case where an active display change gaze effect that is an effect mode that is at least partially in common with the active display change effect is executed. Note that an active display change effect or an active display change effect may be executed as a main notice effect such as a step-up notice effect.

  In addition, the ROM 121 includes a plurality of effect control patterns used by the effect control CPU 120 to control effect operations performed by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the effect model). Data to be stored is stored. By setting the effect control pattern, various variable display operations such as decorative symbols, notice effects (including pre-read notice effects), and the like are realized.

  The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents of various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the effect control pattern is a decoration corresponding to a plurality of types of variation patterns, in the period from when the variation of the special symbol is started in the special game until the finalized special symbol that is the special graphic display result is derived and displayed. Design operations such as variable display operation, reach production, re-lottery production, etc., or various production operations that do not involve variable display of decorative symbols (for example, hold for the display mode of the hold display in the first start winning memory display area 5HL) Such as effects, hold effects for the display mode of the hold display in the second start winning memory display area 5HR, etc.).

  FIG. 9A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern is composed of control data for controlling various effect operations such as an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and an end code. It is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control, the timing of switching the effects control, and the like. In addition, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data for designating the content of operation control in a movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 120. ) And a determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control microcomputer 120 when a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11. Data indicating the switching timing of effect control or the like may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The audio control data includes data indicating an audio output mode from the speaker 8 such as data indicating an output mode of a production sound or the like interlocked with a variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the audio control data is data that specifies an audio output operation from the speaker 8. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating the light emission operation mode of the lamp 9 (light emitter). That is, the lamp control data is data that designates the light emission operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, and extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9. The operation detection control data includes, for example, data indicating a period during which an operation on the operation unit such as the operation button 30 is effectively detected, control contents of the rendering operation when the operation is detected effectively, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that designates an effect operation corresponding to an operation on the operation unit. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern including a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 9B is a diagram for explaining various rendering operations executed according to the contents of the rendering control pattern. The production control CPU 120 determines the control content of the production operation according to various control data included in the production control pattern. For example, when the production control process timer value matches any of the production control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the production control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display effect images such as images and background images on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 8 in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to cause the lamp 9 to emit light in a mode specified by the lamp control data, which is specified by the operation detection control data. Control is performed in which the operation content is determined by receiving an operation on the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B in the operation effective period, which is an operation effective period. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that does not become a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The effect operation shown in FIG. 9B corresponds to the entire period from the start of the change of the decorative design to the final stop, but is not limited to this, and during the variable display of the decorative design An effect control pattern for executing the effect operation corresponding to a part of the period (for example, a period of executing the notice effect) may be provided. Alternatively, in order to execute the presentation operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than the variable display of the decorative symbols (for example, a period in which a round is being executed in the jackpot gaming state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the jackpot gaming state, etc.) The effect control pattern may be provided.

  When setting the production control pattern, the pattern data constituting the relevant production control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the pattern data constituting the relevant production control pattern may be stored. The storage address in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the stored data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer determination values. If the production control process timer value matches, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data is performed. Control. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect devices (image display device 5, speaker 8, lamp 9, and the like) according to the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. The control of the movable member provided in the production model is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control content of the rendering operation in the rendering device and specify the execution of the rendering control. Control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like is developed by reading out image data indicated by the command from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily storing it in the VRAM. On the voice control board 13 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. .

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation, for example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 10A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. Yes.

  The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. The flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags. As a specific example, the production control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the probability change flag, data indicating the on state or the off state, and the like for each of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. The effect control counter setting unit 193 also stores data indicating an effect number count value, which is a stored value of an effect number counter for counting one or both of the number of time reductions and the number of probability changes.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the first start winning reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 10B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first start winning reception command buffer 194A is provided with a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total reserved storage number. . When there is a start winning at the first start winning opening, a start opening winning designation command (first starting slot winning designation command), a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command) ) Are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The first start winning reception command buffer 194A has a storage area so that among these commands, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a first reserved memory number notification command can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the time of the first start prize from the head in the empty area of the first start prize reception command buffer 194A. At the time of the first start winning, command transmission is performed in the order of the first start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the first reserved memory number notification command. Accordingly, if the command is received normally, as shown in FIG. 10B, the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the fluctuation are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. The category command and the first pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10B, the command is stored in the storage area corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “3”.

  The commands stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B are deleted one by one every time variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the first special figure game. Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (in order of winning among commands). Specifically, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the first special figure game, the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the first start opening prize designation command is displayed. One stored command (one set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (corresponding to the first start opening prize designation command) Command) is shifted while maintaining the winning order (buffer number size relationship).

  For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10B, when the variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the first special figure game, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “3” is changed to the buffer number “2”. Shifted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, data configuring the second start winning reception command buffer 194B as shown in FIG. 10C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second start winning reception command buffer 194B is provided with a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total reserved storage number. . When there is a start winning at the second start winning opening, a start opening winning specifying command (second starting opening winning specifying command), a symbol specifying command, a variable category command, a reserved memory number notification command (second reserved memory number notification command) ) Are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. In the second start winning reception command buffer 194B, a storage area is secured so that among these commands, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a pending storage count notification command can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the second start winning prize from the head in the empty area of the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. At the time of the second start winning, command transmission is performed in the order of the second start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the reserved storage number notification command. Therefore, if the command is received normally, as shown in FIG. 10C, the second start opening winning designation command and the symbol designation command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. The variable category command and the pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10C, the commands are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “2”.

  The commands stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B shown in FIG. 10C are deleted one by one every time variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the second special game. Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (in order of winning among commands). Specifically, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the second start opening prize designation command is displayed. One stored command (one set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (corresponding to the second start opening winning designation command) Command) is shifted while maintaining the winning order (buffer number size relationship).

  For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10C, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the second special figure game, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, data constituting the first prefetch notice buffer 194C as shown in FIG. 10D is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first prefetch notice buffer 194C is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the respective data constituting the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, in the first prefetching notice buffer 194C, the contents of the prefetching notice effects relating to the respective hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 and the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Is done. When the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. 10B due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the first prefetch notice buffer 194C, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. Further, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc., the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. When shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C are also shifted to the other buffer number.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the second prefetch notice buffer 194D as shown in FIG. 10E is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second prefetch notice buffer 194D is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the respective data constituting the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. That is, in the second prefetch notice buffer 194D, the contents of the prefetch notice effects relating to the hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 or the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Is done. When the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. 10C due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the second prefetch notice buffer 194D, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. Further, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc., the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. When the number is shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number in the second prefetch notice buffer 194D are also shifted to the other buffer number.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described.

  In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs the necessary initial setting after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process.

  When the CPU 103 executing such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port through the switch circuit 110. The state of detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S13).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the variable display of the normal symbol and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B are movable. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade.

  After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, effect control After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. It is possible to enable transmission of the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table, for example, by turning it off. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S15 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process (step S15) shown in FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning process executed in steps S208 and S211 of the start winning determination process (step S101) shown in FIG. FIG. 15A is a flowchart showing an example of a winning random number determination process executed in step S220 of the start winning process (step S208, step S211) shown in FIG.

  In the start winning determination process (step S101) shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 first uses a detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step S201). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is in an ON state (step S201; YES), the first special figure reservation memory number (the first special figure game hold number) is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, the upper limit memory number). As “4”) (step S202). For example, the CPU 103 only needs to be able to identify the first special figure reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154. When the number of first special figure hold storage is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; NO), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “1” ( Step S207).

  When the first start-up switch 22A is in the OFF state in step S201 (step S201; NO), or when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; YES). After executing the processing of step S209, the second start port switch is based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. It is determined whether or not 22B is in an ON state (step S203). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step S203; YES), the second special figure reservation memory number (second special figure game hold number) is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, the upper limit memory number). As “4”) (step S204). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reserved memory number by reading the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the second special figure holding memory number is not the upper limit value in step S204 (step S204; NO), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “2” ( Step S210).

  After executing the process of step S207, the start winning time process (FIG. 14) is executed (step S208), the stored value of the start port buffer is “0 (initialized)” (step S209), and the process of step S203 is performed. Proceed to After executing the process of step S210, the start winning time process (FIG. 14) is executed (step S211), the stored value of the start port buffer is “0 (initialized)” (step S212), and the start winning determination process Exit. Thereby, even if it is a case where the start winning of a game ball is detected at the same time in the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the processing based on each detection can be completed.

  The CPU 103 is updated so as to add 1 to the number of reserved special figure storage corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, as the start winning time process (steps S208 and S211) shown in FIG. S215). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. Following the process of step S215, the total number of reserved storage is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S216). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated to add one.

  After executing the process of step S216, the CPU 103 determines the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category are extracted (step S217). The numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit 151 corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S218). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the start port buffer value is “2”, Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the second special figure storage unit 151B.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S218, transmission setting of a start opening prize designation command corresponding to the start opening buffer value is performed (step S219). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 is set to transmit a first start opening winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the storage address of the second starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Setting for transmitting the second start opening winning designation command is performed. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is executed by, for example, executing the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interruption process shown in FIG. 11 after the special symbol process process is completed. To the effect control board 12.

  Following the process of step S219, a winning random number determination process is executed (step S220). Thereafter, for example, by storing the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the reserved storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. For this purpose (step S221). The reserved memory number notifying command set in this way is executed when, for example, the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. To the effect control board 12.

  As the winning random number determination process (step S220) shown in FIG. 15, the CPU 103, for example, confirms the state of the time flag or the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152, etc. The current gaming state at is identified (step S401). The CPU 103 identifies the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is on by confirming the state of the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152, and the probability variation flag is off. When the time reduction flag is in the on state, the time reduction state is specified. That is, the CPU 103 determines whether the probability change flag is on and the time reduction flag is on, for example, depending on whether each of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on or off. If the state is a state, the gaming state is identified as a high-probability base state, and if the probability variation flag is on and the time flag is off, the gaming state is identified as a high-probability low base state. If the probability variation flag is off and the time reduction flag is on, the low accuracy high base state is identified. If both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off, the low probability low base state (normal State). That is, the CPU 103 identifies which state the current gaming state is based on the state of the probability change flag and the time-shortage flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152.

  Following the processing in step S401, table data corresponding to the current gaming state is set from the table data constituting the display result determination table 130A (step S402). When using different display result determination tables (first special figure display result determination table, second special figure display result determination table) for the first special figure and the second special figure, the starting port buffer value is “1”. In some cases, the first special figure display result determination table is used, and when the start port buffer value is “2”, the second special figure display result determination table may be used. After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. 14 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step S403). In the big hit determination range, individual decision values assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” in the special figure display result decision table data set by the processing of step S402 are set. It suffices to determine whether or not there is a decision value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the decision value with each other. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value included in the jackpot determination range is set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, when it is determined that the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random value MR1 is determined to be “big hit” (big hit start determination) can do.

  When it is determined in step S403 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S403; YES), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S409). At this time, the CPU 103 determines in accordance with the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified in correspondence with the start port buffer value. The big hit type determination table data is selected from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table 131. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is determined. Settings for transmitting the symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result of the process in step S409 to the effect control board 12 are performed (step S410).

  When it is determined in step S403 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S403; NO), or after any of the processing of step S410 is executed, the variation category is determined (step S412). That is, the variation category is determined as one of a plurality of types shown in FIG. In the process of step S412, the CPU 103 determines a plurality of variable category determination tables stored in the ROM 101 (a plurality of types of variable category determinations that are different from each other, such as the types of variable categories that can be determined in the variable category determination table and the respective determination ratios). One of the variation category determination tables to be set as the use table is selected from among the tables.

  Specifically, the CPU 103 uses a special figure display result (for example, the determination result of step S403) or the stored memory number (for example, the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154). One of the variation category determination tables to be set as a use table is selected based on a certain first stored memory count value or the like. Subsequently, the CPU 103 converts the variation category determination table set as the use table and numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation category extracted from the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. Based on the plurality of types of variation categories, one of the variation categories is determined.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a selection example of the variation category determination table. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a variation category determination table. The configuration example of this variation category determination table is four types of variation category tables that are referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of variation categories. FIG. 17A is a configuration example of a variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL1” in the figure) using a certain variation category determination table among the above four types. FIG. 17B is a configuration example of a variation category determination table based on another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL2” in the figure). FIG. 17C is a configuration example of a variation category determination table based on still another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL3” in the figure). FIG. 17D is a configuration example of a variation category determination table by another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL4” in the figure). For simplification of explanation, the variation category determination table in which the determination ratio is set as shown in FIG. 17A may be simply referred to as the variation category determination table in FIG. The same applies to FIGS. 17B to 17D and other determination tables such as a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 16 shows a selection example in which any setting is selected from the four types (setting “C-TBL1” to setting “C-TBL4”) of FIGS. This is a selection example in which any one of the variation category determination tables is selected from the four types of variation category determination tables.

  The variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 17A (the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 17B, the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 17C, FIG. In the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in (D), numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation category are assigned to a plurality of types of variation categories.

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 17A, 0 out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3 is the variation category. 70 (values in the range from “0” to “69”) are assigned to the variable category “PA2” and 27 (values in the range from “70” to “96”) are assigned to the “PA1”. Assigned to “PA3”, two (values in the range of “97” to “98”) are assigned to the variation category “PA4”, and one (value “99”) is assigned to the variation category “PA5”. Yes. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 17A, the variation category “PA1” is 0% (0 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 70% (70 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 27% (27 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 17B, four (“0”) out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 3 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PA1 ”, 85 (values in the range of“ 4 ”to“ 88 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PA2 ”, and 8 (“ 89 ” ”To“ 96 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA3 ”, two (values in the range of“ 97 ”to“ 98 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA4 ”, and one (value“ 99 ”) is assigned to the variable category“ PA5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 17B, the variation category “PA1” is 4% (4 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 85% (85 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 8% (8 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 17C, 64 (“0”) out of 100 determined values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 63 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PA1 ”, 25 (values in the range of“ 64 ”to“ 88 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PA2 ”, and 8 (“ 89 ” ”To“ 96 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA3 ”, two (values in the range of“ 97 ”to“ 98 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA4 ”, and one (value“ 99 ”) is assigned to the variable category“ PA5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 17C, the variation category “PA1” is 64% (64 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 25% (25 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 8% (8 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 17D, 20 (“0”) out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 19 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB3 ”, and 40 (values in the range of“ 20 ”to“ 59 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB4 ”and 40 (“ 60 ” ”To“ 99 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 17D, the variation category “PB3” is 20% (20 ÷ 100), the variation category “PB4” is 40% (40 ÷ 100), The variation category “PB5” is determined at a rate of 40% (40 ÷ 100).

  In the setting examples of FIGS. 17A to 17C, when the special figure display result is “losing”, when the number of reserved memories is large, compared to when the number of reserved memories is small, shortening / non-reach ( Loss) The determination rate of the variation category (variation category “PA1”) is increased. Specifically, the determination rate “64%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the number of stored storages is “4”. > Determination ratio “4%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the reserved storage number is “3” or “2” > The determination ratio “0%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the number of stored storages is “1”.

  Also, in the setting examples of FIGS. 17A to 17C, when the special figure display result is “losing”, the fluctuation category ( The determination ratio of the variation category “PA4” or the variation category “PA5”) is made constant. Specifically, in any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, the determination ratio “ 1% ”, and the decision rate“ 2% ”for the variable category“ PA4 ”.

  In the setting examples of FIG. 17A to FIG. 17C, any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” is used. Even so, there is a determined value of the random value MR3 corresponding to the same (common) variation category (the same variation category is determined). That is, if the determined value of the random value MR3 is a certain value, it is any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”. Also, the same variation category is determined. For example, when the determined value of the random number MR3 is “99”, any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” Also, the variation category “PA5” is determined. When the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “97” to “98”, the variation category “PA4” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables.

  Further, when the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “89” to “96”, the variation category “PA3” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables. When the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “64” to “69”, the variation category “PA2” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables. As a result, if the determined value of the random number MR3 is a certain value (a value in each of the above-described ranges), the reach, the super reach, the super reach α, and the super reach β are determined in advance. It can be easily determined. Accordingly, it is possible to notify them before the variable display corresponding to the start prize, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. In the setting examples of FIGS. 17A to 17C, when the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “0” to “69”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, In either the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” or the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, the variation category “PA1” or “PA2” is determined. Thereby, it can be easily determined in advance whether at least the reach is not achieved.

  Then, after performing the setting for transmitting any of the variation category commands shown in FIG. 15B to the effect control board 12 according to the determination result (decision result) by the process of step S412 (step S413), the winning random number determination process is terminated.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 in FIG. 12, the CPU 103 selects any of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. And run.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance. The special symbol normal process will be described later.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types shown in FIG. 5, a first variation start command (or a second variation start command), a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command. The transmission setting process for transmitting etc. is included. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable symbol special display is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “2”. The setting of the variation pattern will be described later. In the variation pattern setting process in step S111, the variation pattern may be determined as follows. That is, the variation category is determined using the random number MR3 for determining the variation category stored in step S218 of the start winning process, similarly to step S412 of the winning random number determination process. Subsequently, based on the variation category as the determination result, one of the variation pattern determination tables to be set as the use table is selected from the plurality of variation pattern determination tables stored in the ROM 101. Subsequently, the CPU 103 selects one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variation pattern determination table set as the use table and the numerical data indicating the newly extracted random number MR5 for variation pattern determination. The variation pattern may be determined. In the start winning process, the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is extracted and stored in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation category, and stored in the variation pattern setting process in step S111. The variation pattern may be determined using the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern stored in the time process.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special diagram variation timer value, which is the stored value in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is subtracted or incremented by one. The first special symbol game (special game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol game (special game using the second special symbol) by the second special symbol display device 4B The elapsed time is measured by a common timer regardless of whether the game is a graphic game). Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the special symbol variation process of step S112 only needs to be a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol that is the variable symbol display result is stopped and displayed (derived). A process for performing the setting is included. In addition, when the gaming state is other than the low probability low base state (normal mode), that is, in the case of one or both of the probability variation state (high probability state) and the short time state (high base state), , Processing for adding the counter value of the variation counter by the game control counter setting unit 154, processing for resetting, special figure in the probability variation state (high accuracy state), and special diagram in the short time state (high base state) Processing to determine whether or not the number of times the game has been executed has reached a predetermined number of times, and the probability variation control and time shortening control for controlling to one or both of the probability variation state (high accuracy state) and the time-short state (high base state) are terminated and low accuracy is achieved. The game state transition process at the time of change such as a process for setting one or both of the state and the low base state is also included.

  Then, a determination is made as to whether or not the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is in an on state. Updated to When the big hit flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit release pre-processing includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and setting the big winning opening to the open state based on the fact that the variable display result becomes “big hit”, etc. include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened may be set in accordance with whether the big hit type is “16R probability change big hit” or “8R probability change big hit”. As an example, corresponding to the jackpot type “16R probability variation jackpot”, the upper limit of the period during which the winning prize opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”, and the opening of the winning prize opening which is the upper limit number of times to execute the round is set. By setting the number of times to “16 times”, the normal open big hit state may be set. On the other hand, corresponding to the jackpot type “8R probability variation jackpot”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”, and the number of opening of the big winning opening that becomes the upper limit number of times to execute the round is set. Is set to “8 times” so that the normal open big hit state may be set. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In the big hit opening process, the winning prize opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the special winning opening door solenoid 82, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”. .

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, the process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the winning opening is in the open state has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, or the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening has been reached. In some cases, processing for setting to transmit a jackpot end designation command is included. When the number of round executions has not reached the maximum value of the number of times of winning the special winning opening, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value of the process flag is updated to “7”.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for informing the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, or the lamp 9. And a post-hit game state transition process, which will be described later, for performing settings for starting probability variation control and time-saving control in response to the end of the big hit game state. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of the special symbol process (step S15) shown in FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure holding storage number is “0” (step S231). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second special figure game is put on hold. For example, in the process of step S231, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S231 (step S231; NO), the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B stores the correspondence corresponding to the reservation number “1”. As data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S232). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting and updating the second reserved memory number count value by 1, etc., the second special figure reserved memory number is updated by 1 and the second special figure reserved memory is also updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted upward by one entry in the unit 151B. (Step S233). Further, in the process of step S233, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total pending storage number count value stored in the total pending storage number counter by one. At this time, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is updated to “2” (step S234).

  When the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” in step S231 (step S231; YES), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (step S235). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special figure game is put on hold. For example, in the process of step S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is “0”. That's fine.

  As described above, since the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure holding storage number is “0”, the first special figure game and the second special figure are executed. When the game is put on hold, the second special game is executed with priority over the first special game. It should be noted that the second special figure game is not limited to being executed in preference to the first special figure game, and the game ball enters (passes through) the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening). ) And the special game (first special game, second special game) may be executed in the order in which the start prizes (first start prize, second start prize) are generated. In this case, it is only necessary to provide a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated, and to determine which of the first special game and the second special game is to be executed from the stored data.

  When the number of first special figure hold storage number is other than “0” in step S235 (step S235; NO), the hold stored in correspondence with the hold number “1” in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A. As the data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S236). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the process of step S236, for example, by updating the first reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating the first special figure reserved memory number, the first special figure reserved memory is updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entry lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) in the unit 151A is shifted upward by one entry. (Step S237). Further, in the process of step S237, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total pending storage number count value stored in the total pending storage number counter by one. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S238).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S234 and S238, as a use table for determining whether the special figure display result, which is the variable symbol display result, is “big hit” or “losing”. The data of the display result determination table is set (step S239) in the same manner as the process of step S402 of the winning random number determination process (step S220) shown in FIG. When different display result determination tables (first special figure display result determination table, second special figure display result determination table) are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, in the process of step S402, the start port buffer is used. The value (“1” or “2”) is referred to, but in the process of step S239, the variable special figure designation buffer value (“1” or “2”) may be referred to.

  Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the determined values assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit” and “losing”. Then, it is determined whether the special figure display result is “big hit” or “lost” (step S240).

  After determining the special figure display result in step S240, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S241). And when it determines with it being a "hit" (step S241; YES), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting part 152 is set to an ON state (step S242). At this time, the big hit type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (step S243). By referring to the big hit type determination table 131 set in this way, numerical data indicating the big hit type determining random number value MR2 stored in the random number buffer for variation is set to “16R probability variable big hit” and “8R probability variable big hit”. Depending on which of the determined values assigned to the jackpot type is matched, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be made (step S244).

  Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value that is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S245), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the big hit type is “16R probability variation big hit”, the big hit type buffer value may be “1”, and if “8R certain variation big hit”, it may be “2”.

  If it is determined in step S241 that it is not a “hit” (step S241; NO) or after performing any of the processes in step S245, the result of a prior decision as to whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state, A confirmed special symbol is set corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type when the jackpot gaming state is set (step S248).

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S249), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . In step S235, if the number of reserved figures stored in the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (step S235; YES), a predetermined demonstration display setting is performed (step S250), and then the special symbol is set. Normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  In the variation pattern setting process of step S111 following the special symbol normal process of step S110, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern using the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category and the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern.

  In the variation pattern setting process (step S111), the variation category is determined in the same manner as the winning random number determination process (step S220). However, when the winning random number determination process (step S220) is executed and the variation pattern setting is performed. In the specific examples of the variation category determination tables “C-TBL1” to “C-TBL3” shown in FIG. If the random number MR3 is “99”, for example, the variation category “PA5” is determined in both the winning random number determination process and the variation pattern setting process, regardless of the number of reserved memories. Also, if the random number MR3 extracted at the time of winning is in the range of “97” to “98”, for example, the variation category “PA4” regardless of the number of reserved memories, both in the winning random number determination processing and the variation pattern setting processing. Is determined.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio of the variation pattern. It is assumed that the ROM 101 stores eight types of variation pattern determination tables corresponding to the variation categories. FIG. 19A is an example of setting a variation pattern determination ratio based on a variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA1 (shortening / non-reach loss)” among the above eight types. FIG. 19B is a setting example of the variation pattern determination ratio based on the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA2 (non-reach (loss))” among the above eight types. FIG. 19C is an example of setting the variation pattern determination ratio by the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (loss))” among the above eight types. The same applies to FIGS. 19D to 19H.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of the special symbol process (step S15) shown in FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 20, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is in an on state (step S291). If the big hit flag is in the on state (step S291; YES), the CPU 103 sets a big hit start production waiting time (step S292). For example, in the process of step S 292, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the big hit start presentation waiting time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S292, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S293). For example, in the process of step S293, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start specifying command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start specifying command is stored in the buffer specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. It only has to be stored in the area. Thereafter, the CPU 103 clears the big hit flag and turns it off (step S294). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the big hit release pre-processing (step S295), and then ends the special symbol stop process.

  When the big hit flag is in the off state in step S291 (step S291; NO), the CPU 103 performs a gaming state transition process during variation (step S296). Subsequently, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to “0” that is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S297), and then ends the special symbol stop process.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the changing gaming state transition process executed in step S296 of the special symbol stop process (step S113) shown in FIG. In the changing gaming state transition process shown in FIG. 21, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a low probability low base state (step S451). CPU 103 determines that the current gaming state is the low probability low base state when both of the probability change flag and the short time flag provided in game control flag setting unit 152 are in the off state. If it is determined in step S451 that the current gaming state is the low probability low base state (step S451; YES), the CPU 103 ends the changing gaming state transition process as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S451 that the low-probability / low-base state is not established (step S451; YES), the value of the variation counter is incremented by 1 (step S452). The variation counter is the number of executions of the special figure game after being controlled to the low probability low base state, and is the number of times compared with the ST number (probability variation number) and the short time number. The ST count (number of times of probability change) is the number of times of execution of the special figure game for executing the probability change control. The number of time reductions is the number of executions of the special figure game for executing the time reduction control. The number of STs (the number of probability changes) and the number of time reductions are set in the hit end process (FIGS. 12 and 22).

  Subsequent to the processing in step S452, the CPU 103 reads the number of STs (the number of probability changes) (step S453) and reads the number of time reductions (step S454). Subsequent to the processing in step S454, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state) (step S455). When the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is in the on state, the CPU 103 determines that the current game state is in the high probability state. If it is determined in step S455 that the current gaming state is a highly probable state (step S455; YES), the CPU 103 indicates that the value of the variation counter is a value indicated by the ST count (probability variation count) read in step S453. It is determined whether or not the value is greater than (for example, 70 times) (step S456). When it is determined that the value of the variation number counter is larger than the value indicated by the ST number (the number of times of probability variation) (step S456; YES), the CPU 103 clears the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. For example, the gaming state is set to a low probability state by turning it off (step S457), and the probability variation control is terminated.

  After executing the process of step S457, or when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the high probability state (step S455; NO), the value of the variation counter is larger than the value indicated by the ST count (probability variation count). If it is determined that it is not (step S456; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a high base state (time-short state) (step S458). When the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is in the on state, the CPU 103 determines that the current game state is the high base state (time reduction state). When it is determined in step S458 that the current gaming state is the high base state (short time state) (step S458; YES), the CPU 103 determines that the value of the variation counter is a value indicated by the short time number read in step S454. It is determined whether the value is greater than (for example, 70 times) (step S459). When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter is larger than the value indicated by the number of time reductions (step S459; YES), the CPU 103 clears the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 and enters the off state. For example, the gaming state is set to a low base state (step S460), and the time-shortening control is terminated.

  After the processing of step S460, or when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the high base state (short time state) (step S458; NO), the value of the variation counter is indicated by the short time number and is not greater than the value. (Step S459; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the gaming state has become a low probability low base state (step S461). When both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 are in the off state, the CPU 103 determines that the gaming state has become the low probability low base state.

  If it is determined in step S461 that the low-probability / low-base state has been reached (step S461; YES), the CPU 103 clears the set value of the ST count (probability change count) to “0” (step S462), and sets the time-saving count. The value is cleared to “0” (step S463), the value of the variation counter is cleared to “0” (step S464), and the variation gaming state transition process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S461 that the low probability low base state has not been reached (step S461; NO), the variation gaming state transition process is terminated without executing steps S462, S463, and S464.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end process executed in step S117 of the special symbol process (step S15) shown in FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 22, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed (step S <b> 311). As an example, in the post-hit release post-processing (step S116) shown in FIG. A value is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S311, the CPU 103 updates, for example, by subtracting 1 from the game control process timer value, and whether the updated game control process timer value matches the predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value. Whether or not the big hit end production waiting time has elapsed may be determined depending on whether or not.

  If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in step S311 (step S311; NO), the CPU 103 ends the big hit end processing as it is. On the other hand, when the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed in step S311 (step S311; YES), the CPU 103 reads the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S312). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to an on state, for example, and sets it to a high probability state (probability change state) (step S314). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets a short time flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to an on state, for example, and sets it to a high base state (step S315). That is, at the end of the big hit gaming state, the gaming state is set to a highly accurate and high base state by the processing of step S314 and step S315.

  Following the processing of step S315, the CPU 103 sets the set value of the ST count (probability change count) to 70 times (step S316) and sets the time reduction count to 70 times (step S317). Subsequently, the CPU 103 clears the value of the fluctuation number counter to “0” (step S318), and ends the big hit ending process.

  In the present embodiment, the setting value of the ST number (the number of times of probability variation) and the setting value of the time reduction number of 70 are set to the same value (both are 70 times). The number of times may be different from the set value of 70 times. In this embodiment, the set value of the ST count (probability change count) in the case of 8R probability variation big hit and the set value of the ST count (probability change count) in the case of 16R probability change big hit are the same value (both are 70 times). However, the setting value of the ST count (probability variation count) in the case of 8R probability variation big hit may be different from the set value of the ST count (probability variation count) in the case of 16R probability variation big hit. In this embodiment, the setting value of the short time in the case of 8R probability variation big hit and the setting value of the short time in the case of 16R probability variation big hit are the same value (both are 70 times). The setting value for the number of time reductions may be different from the setting value for the number of time reductions in the case of 16R probability variation big hit. When the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is “1”, the CPU 103 determines that it is a 16R probability variable big hit, and when the jackpot type buffer value is “2”. May be determined to be an 8R probability variation big hit.

  As described above, in the main board 11, in the start winning determination process in step S101, transmission setting for transmitting the start opening winning designation command corresponding to the start opening buffer value is performed to the effect control board 12 ( In step S219), transmission setting for transmitting the symbol designation command according to the special symbol display result determined in step S403 or the like is performed (step S410), and the variation category command corresponding to the variation category determined in step S412 Is set for transmitting (step S413), and transmission setting for transmitting the pending storage number notification command is performed (step S221). After these processes are executed, a command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 is executed, so that the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening) is set. When the game ball passes (enters) and the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, a start opening prize designation command (first start opening prize designation command or second start opening prize designation command), symbol designation command, Four commands, ie, a variable category command and a pending storage count notification command (a first pending storage count notification command or a second pending storage count notification command) are collectively transmitted as one set within one timer interrupt.

  In the main board 11, in the special symbol normal process of step S110, a fixed special symbol that becomes a variable symbol display result of the special symbol using the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, or the like In the variation pattern setting process in step S111, the variation pattern of the decorative design is determined using the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category, the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, and the like.

  Further, in the variation pattern setting process of step S111, a variable display result notification command for designating the confirmed special symbol determined as described above, a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern of the decorative symbol determined as described above, and the like. Transmission settings for transmission to the effect control board 12 are performed. When these processes are executed, the variable control result notification command or the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. A variation pattern designation command or the like is transmitted in a batch within one timer interrupt. Note that the commands are not limited to those that are transmitted all at once in one timer interrupt, and commands may be sequentially transmitted one by one by the command control process in step S17 for each timer interrupt.

  That is, at the timing when the special symbol or decorative symbol variable display is started, the special symbol normal processing (step S110) is performed, and the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is set to “big hit” to control the big hit gaming state. In the variation pattern setting process (step S111), a specific variable display mode (variation pattern) of the decorative symbols is determined, and the contents determined by each effect control command are determined. It is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Prior to this, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening), the winning random number value determination process (step S220) determines “big hit”. Determination of whether or not the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state, determination of a general variable display mode (fluctuation category) of the decorative design, etc. are performed, and the contents determined by each presentation control command are transmitted to the presentation control board 12 Is done.

  In addition, when the big hit (8R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit), in the big hit end processing of step S117, the ST number (number of probability variation) and the number of time reductions are both 70 times. Set to state. In addition, the variation counter is counted up in each variation when the gaming state is the high-probability base state (step S452), and the gaming state is in the low-probability state when the variation counter exceeds the ST number (probability variation number). (Step S457), and the gaming state is set to a low base when the variation counter exceeds the number of time reductions (step S460).

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process (step S70) as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in step S70 of FIG. 23 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and effects control. The register setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) mounted on the substrate 12 is performed. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is in the off state (step S72; NO), the process of step S72 is repeatedly executed and waited.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, control that becomes an effect control command or the like from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture the signal.

  The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S72 (step S72; YES), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S73), and command analysis processing is executed (step S74). In the command analysis process executed in step S74, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S74, an effect control process is executed (step S75). In the effect control process in step S75, for example, various effect devices such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speaker 8, a light emission operation in the lamp 9, and a drive operation in the effect model. The contents of the control of the effect operation using the are determined, determined, set according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

After performing the effect control process in step S75, the effect control CPU 120 executes the simultaneous effect process (step S76). Here, “simultaneous production” will be described. The simultaneous performance in the present embodiment is an effect mode illustrated as an example of a specific effect, and is an effect mode that is executed all at once when a predetermined condition is established in a plurality of gaming machines installed in a game store. is there. The case where the predetermined condition for executing the simultaneous performance is satisfied is, for example, a time when the current time becomes a predetermined time as a time for performing the simultaneous performance. In the present embodiment, the case where the effect control CPU 120 measures the current time and determines whether or not the current time is a time for executing the simultaneous effect (hereinafter referred to as “simultaneous effect execution time”). To do. It is assumed that the start time and the end time are set as the simultaneous performance execution time. The simultaneous performance is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) from the start time to the end time. The effect executed in the simultaneous effect is executed using an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the lamp 9. By simultaneously displaying the same video on the display screen of the image display device 5 of a plurality of gaming machines installed in the amusement store, simultaneously outputting the same music or the like from the speaker 8, or aligning the lighting state of the lamp 9, It is possible to improve the production effect at a game store where a plurality of gaming machines that perform simultaneous production are installed.
The simultaneous production in step S76 is repeatedly executed every time the timer interrupt flag is turned on in the production control main process (step S70) (step S72; YES). That is, the simultaneous effect process is performed regardless of the state of the effect process flag described later in the effect post-production process process in step S75, that is, the gaming machine is variably displayed, is waiting for a special figure, or is a big hit. This process is always executed regardless of whether it exists. Therefore, even if the state of the effect process flag is different among the plurality of gaming machines, the simultaneous effect is similarly performed. Details of the simultaneous effect process in step S76 will be described later with reference to FIG.
Following the simultaneous effect process in step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and the effect random number counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 is used as various random number values used for effect control. The numerical data shown is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S72.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the command analysis process executed in step S74 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 24, the effect control CPU 120 first receives the command received from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is (step S501). At this time, if there is no received command (step S501; NO), the command analysis process is terminated.

  If there is a reception command in step S501 (step S501; YES), for example, by checking the MODE data of the reception command, it is determined whether or not the reception command is the first start opening prize designation command. (Step S502). Then, when it is the first start opening winning designation command (step S502; YES), a first reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step S503). For example, in the process of step S503, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192. That's fine.

  If the received command is not the first start opening winning designation command in step S502 (step S502; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second starting opening winning designation command (step S504). If the command is the second start opening winning designation command (step S504; YES), a second reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step S505). For example, in the process of step S505, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second pending storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

  If it is determined in step S504 that the received command is not the second start opening winning designation command (step S504; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is a symbol designation command (step S506). If the received command is not a symbol designation command in step S506 (step S506; NO), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step S507). If the received command is not a variable category command in step S507 (step S507; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is a first pending storage number notification command (step S508). When the command is the first pending storage count notification command (step S508; YES), the first pending storage count notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step S509). .

  If the received command is not the first reserved memory number notification command in step S508 (step S508; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second reserved memory number notification command (step S510). When the command is the second pending storage count notification command (step S510; YES), the second pending storage count notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step S511). .

  If the received command is a symbol designation command in step S506 (step S506; YES), if the received command is a variable category command in step S507 (step S507; YES), or steps S503, S505, S509, S511. After executing any of the above processes, if the first pending storage number notification waiting time is set in the process of step S503 for the received command received immediately before the received command, the received command is After storing at the head of the empty area in the reception command buffer 194A at the time of 1 start winning (Step S512), the process returns to Step S501.

  Further, when the received command is a symbol designation command at step S506 (step S506; YES), when the received command is a variable category command at step S507 (step S507; YES), or steps S503, S505, S509. After executing any one of the processes of S511, if the second pending storage number notification waiting time is set in the process of step S503 for the received command received immediately before the received command, the received command Is stored at the head of the empty area in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B (step S512), and the process returns to step S501.

  When the first reserved memory number notification command is received together with the first variation start command, the reserved memory number notification command may not be stored in the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A. That is, it is only necessary that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the first start winning received command buffer 194A.

  Further, when the second reserved memory number notification command is received together with the second variation start command, the reserved memory number notification command may not be stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. That is, it is only necessary that the effect control command received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the second start winning received command buffer 194B.

  If the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command in step S510 (step S510; NO), after making settings according to other received commands (step S513), the process returns to step S501. For example, when the received command is a gaming state designation command, the gaming state designation command is analyzed to identify the current gaming state. Also, for example, when the received command is a hit end designation command, the hit end designation command is analyzed to determine whether the time is short.

  Start opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variation category command, reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command, second reserved memory number) An effect control command received from the main board 11 when a start winning is generated as in the case of a notification command) is also referred to as a start winning command. The first reserved memory number notification command, the second reserved memory number notification command, the first start opening prize designation command, and the second start opening prize designation command are also referred to as reserved storage information. The symbol designation command and the variation category command are also referred to as determination result information.

  Note that when receiving commands are sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the first start winning received command buffer 194A, it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command, a variable category command, or a first reserved memory count notification command. The received commands may be stored without distinction, or may be stored at the head of the free area in the corresponding storage area.

  In addition, when storing received commands sequentially from the beginning of the empty area in the second start winning received command buffer 194B, it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command, a variable category command, or a second reserved memory number notification command. The received commands may be stored without distinction, or may be stored at the head of the free area in the corresponding storage area.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process executed in step S75 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 25, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a winning effect determining process (step S150). In the winning effect determining process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the stored contents in the start winning reception command buffer (the first starting winning reception command buffer 194A or the second starting winning reception command buffer 194B). , A process for determining whether or not a start opening winning designation command is received as a received command, and a display mode (also referred to as a display mode at the time of addition) of a hold display when additionally displaying in the start winning memory display area 5H are determined. The process to perform is performed.

  After performing the winning effect determination process in step S150, for example, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like, one of the following processes in steps S170 to 177 is performed. Select and execute.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” which is an initial value. This variable display start waiting process is based on whether a first variation start command (or second variation start command), a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main board 11 are received. This includes processing for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the display device 5, processing for displaying processing for executing demonstration effects (customer waiting demonstration display), and the like. When it is determined that the decorative symbol variable display is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the decorative symbols in the image display device 5 In order to perform the variable display and other various production operations, the process of determining the fixed decorative design according to the variation pattern of the special symbol and the type of the display result, or the first hold display or the second hold display is shifted and activated. Including a process for displaying a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display in the display area AHA, a process for determining various effects (for example, main notice effect), and the like. Yes. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192, based on the effect control pattern determined in the variable display start setting process. Various control data are read out, and various effect control (for example, decorative display variable display control during decorative display variable display) is performed. Specifically, the CPU 120 for effect control is based on the read control data (process data) and outputs a video signal (effect image) to the image display device 5 and displays it on the screen. Various effect controls are executed, such as a control for outputting a production sound from the speaker 8 by outputting to the board 13 and a control for turning on / off / flashing the lamp 9 by outputting an electrical decoration signal to the lamp control board 14.

  After performing such effect control, for example, it corresponds to the fact that the end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or that the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is displayed completely stopped. If the final decorative design is displayed in a complete stop in response to the end code being read from the production control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed. Even if the production control command from the main board 11 is not used, it is possible to determine and display the variable display result by autonomously deriving and displaying the confirmed decorative pattern on the production control board 12 side. When the definitive decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. This waiting process per special figure includes a process of counting the number of STs (the number of times of probability change) and the number of time reductions, a process of updating the value of the production number counter, and a process of changing the gaming state according to the value of the production number counter Can include. In this special symbol waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 sets the fanfare effect and updates the value of the effect process flag to “4” when the stop symbol is a big hit symbol, and the stop symbol is not a big hit symbol. In this case, the value of the production process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  The big hit start process of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. This jackpot start process is executed before the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened, and a fanfare effect is performed, or an effect (for example, when the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened) (for example, This includes processing for setting an effect corresponding to a normal song, an effect corresponding to a special song, and the like. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”.

  The in-round process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. This in-round processing is executed when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state, and an effect when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state (for example, an effect corresponding to a normal song or a special song) For example, an effect corresponding to a normal song, an effect corresponding to a special song, or the like) is set. It includes processing to do. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6”.

  The round post-process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. This round post-processing is executed when the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the open state. When a special winning opening releasing notification command is received from the main board 11, an effect to be executed when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state (for example, an effect corresponding to a normal song or a special song) The effect process flag value is updated to “5”. When a hit end designation command is received from the main board 11, the ending effect is set and the value of the effect process flag is updated to “7”.

  The process after the big hit in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. This post-hit processing is executed before the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, and the processing for executing the ending effect, the processing for setting the gaming state, the ST number (the number of times of probability change), and the number of time reductions are set. Processing to be performed. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start waiting process executed in step S170 of the effect control process (step S75) shown in FIG. In the variable display start waiting process shown in FIG. 26, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a first change start command (or a second change start command) has been received (step S1000).

  When it is determined in step S1000 that the first variation start command (or second variation start command) has not been received (step S1000; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the demonstration effect flag is on. Determination is made (step S1002). The demonstration effect flag is a flag indicating whether or not a customer waiting demonstration display is being performed. When the demonstration performance flag is on (for example, the value “1”), this indicates that the customer waiting demonstration display is being performed, and when the demonstration performance flag is off (for example, the value “0”). Indicates that the customer waiting demonstration is not displayed. The value of the demonstration effect flag may be stored in the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example.

When it is determined in step S1002 that the demonstration effect flag is not on (step S1002; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a customer waiting demonstration designation command is received (step S1004). If it is determined in step S1004 that no customer waiting demonstration designation command has been received (step S1004; NO), the variable display start waiting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1004 that a customer waiting demonstration designation command has been received (step S1004; YES), the demonstration effect flag is set to ON (step S1006), and the demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration display) is set. Process data (effect control pattern) is selected (step S1008), and an effect control process timer is started (step S1010). Thereby, based on the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the demonstration production (customer waiting demonstration display) is started.
Thereafter, the variable display start waiting process is terminated.
In the present embodiment, the case where it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received in the variable display start waiting process in step S170 as a condition for starting the demonstration presentation has been described. The conditions are not limited to this. For example, the demonstration effect may be started when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display was stopped. Further, the demonstration effect may be started by detecting that the player is not in a gaming state by a sensor or the like.

If it is determined in step S1002 that the demonstration effect flag is on (step S1002; YES), that is, if the demonstration effect has already been performed, the effect control CPU 120 performs a predetermined operation (for example, stick controller 31A). Or a predetermined operation using the push button 31B or the like) is determined (step S1012). If it is determined in step S1012 that there is no predetermined operation (step S1012; NO), the variable display start waiting process is terminated. In other words, the demonstration production is continued.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1012 that there is a predetermined operation (step S1012; YES), the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect adjustment display (step S1013).

The effect adjustment display is an aspect of effect adjustment means. In the production adjustment display, the production means is adjusted by “display”. The effect adjustment display is executed, for example, by displaying an icon or the like indicating the setting status of the effect means on the display screen of the image display device 5.
The production means is, for example, sound output means such as a speaker 8 and light emitting means such as an LED 9. When the effect means is a sound output means, the effect adjustment display is, for example, an icon display for volume adjustment displayed on the image display device 5. When the effect means is a light emitting means, the effect adjustment display is, for example, a brightness adjustment icon display displayed on the image display device 5.
The player visually confirms the effect adjustment display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 and, for example, the volume of the effect means with the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B described in FIG. , Adjust brightness etc.

  Appropriate volume output from the speaker 8 or the like as the effect means and appropriate luminance of the LED 9 as the effect means improve the effect for the player. On the other hand, an inappropriate volume output from the speaker 8 or the like or an inappropriate brightness of the LED 9 may cause a disadvantage such as discomfort to the player.

The effect adjustment display is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 based on the process data described in FIG. That is, the control content of the rendering operation such as display, change, and deletion of the rendering adjustment display is preset in the process data. For example, in the process data, it is possible to set the control content for displaying the setting state of the sound volume and the brightness of the effect means by an icon or the like. In the process data, control details for changing the effect adjustment display (increase / decrease in volume display, etc.) when the player operates the push button 31B, the cross key, etc. to change the volume and brightness settings are set. Can do. The process data includes control details for erasing the effect adjustment display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 when the player operates the push button 31B, the cross key or the like or when a predetermined time has elapsed. Can be set.
After executing the process of step S1013, the variable display start waiting process (step S170) is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S1000 that the first variation start command (or second variation start command) has been received (step S1000; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the demonstration effect flag is on. Determination is made (step S1022). If it is determined in step S1022 that the demonstration effect flag is on (step S1022; YES), that is, if the demonstration effect has already been performed, the demonstration effect flag is reset to the off state (step S1024). Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1” which is a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S1026), and the variable display start waiting process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1022 that the demonstration effect flag is not on (step S1022; NO), the process of step S1024 is omitted (it skips), and the value of the effect process flag corresponds to the variable display start setting process. After the updated value is updated to “1” (step S1026), the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of the effect control process (step S75) shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 27, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and the special figure display result is “lost”. It is determined whether or not (step S522).

  When it is determined in step S522 that the special figure display result is “losing” (step S522; YES), the effect control CPU 120 reads the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example. , The non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the designated variation pattern sets the decorative display variable display mode to “non-reach (loss)” (that is, “PA1-1”, “PA2-1”, “PA2-” in FIG. 5). 2 "" PA2-3 ") or not (step S523).

  If it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S523; YES), the production control CPU 120 determines a combination of the confirmed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) constituting the non-reach combination (step S524). ). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined left determined symbol determination table, the left determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the determined decorative symbols.

  Next, a predetermined right determined symbol determination table preliminarily stored in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted by extracting numerical data indicating random values for determining the right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. , Etc., the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. , Etc., the middle fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the fixed decorative symbols. In the process of step S524, a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination that becomes a predetermined chance symbol symbol may be determined in response to the case where the changing symbol notice is being executed.

  If it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S523; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of the confirmed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) constituting the reach combination (step S525). As an example, in the process of step S525, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left and right determined symbols updated by a random counter or the like provided in the production control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. In addition, by referring to a predetermined left / right determined symbol determination table or the like, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols are stopped and displayed together. The decorative symbol with the same symbol number is determined. Further, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to this, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined.

  Here, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value (For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not a jackpot combination but a reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S522 that the special figure display result is not “losing” (step S522; NO), that is, when the special figure display result is “big hit (16R positive variable big hit, 8R positive variable big hit)”, the effect control CPU 120 Determines the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) constituting the jackpot combination (step S528). As an example, in the process of step S528, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the jackpot fixed symbol updated by the random counter of the production control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and subsequently stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined jackpot determined symbol determination table, etc., the display is stopped and aligned in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5. A decorative design having the same design number is determined.

  When determining the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols in step S528, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the big hit type (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit) is, the presence or absence of the promotion effect, and the like. The design may be determined.

  As a specific example, for example, a jackpot combination dedicated to 16R probability variation jackpot (for example, three odd-numbered identical decorative symbols are arranged) and a jackpot combination dedicated to 8R probability variation jackpot (for example, an even number of identical ornamental symbols are identical) In the mode of 3), in the case of 16R probability variation big hit, either the big hit combination exclusive for 16R probability variation big hit or the big hit combination exclusively for 8R probability variation big hit may be determined as the confirmed decorative design. . At this time, when the big hit combination dedicated to the 8R probability variable big hit is determined to be a confirmed decorative symbol, it is only necessary to notify the player that the 16R probability big hit is made until the end of the 8th round as the promotion effect. On the other hand, in the case of 8R probability variation big hit, it is only necessary to determine whether it is a big hit combination exclusively for 8R probability variation big hit as a definite decorative symbol.

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit (surprise accuracy) is not provided, but when the 2R probability variation big hit (surprise accuracy) is provided and the special figure display result is “big hit (2R probability variation big hit (accuracy variation)”, the effect control The CPU 120 may determine a combination of a confirmed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) corresponding to the 2R probability variation big hit (crash probability).

  After executing any one of the processes from step S525 to step S528, the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold digest process (step S530). Specifically, an active display corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the change is displayed in the active display area AHA (in other words, a special image including the active display corresponding to the change is displayed). For example, when the change of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the first special symbol game (when the variable display of the decorative symbol is linked to the first special symbol game), the first start winning memory display area An active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of 5HL is displayed in the active display area AHA (a special image including an active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the first start winning storage display area 5HL Is displayed).

  More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 moves the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the first start winning memory display area 5HL to the active display area AHA to display the active display. Is set as a usage pattern, and the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set production control pattern is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. An active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the area 5HL is displayed in the active display area AHA. Note that the active display in the active display area AHA may be displayed in the same manner as the hold display, or may be displayed in a display manner corresponding to the hold display but different from the hold display. The same is true when the variation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special figure game.

  Also, in the process of step S530, when there is a hold display in addition to the hold display (active display) to be digested in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, the effect control CPU 120 displays the other hold display as the first. When there is a hold display in addition to the active display in the second start prize storage display area 5HR, the other hold display is shifted in the second start prize storage display area 5HR.

  After executing the pending digest process in step S530, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation as a use pattern (step S532). That is, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 as the usage pattern.

  In the effect control pattern set in step S532, process data indicating the control contents of the effect operation of the first effect movable part 352L exemplified as the first accessory, and the first effect movable part 352R exemplified as the second accessory. Process data indicating the control content of the production operation is included. The process data included in the effect control pattern includes, for example, a first effect motor 310, a first effect solenoid 316, a second effect solenoid 341, and a second effect for moving the first effect movable unit 352. Control data for controlling the production operation of the motor is included. Further, the effect control pattern set in step S532 may include an image to be displayed on the image display device 5, a sound output from the speaker 8, or process data indicating an effect manner of lighting the lamp 9. That is, when an effect using the first effect movable unit 352 is executed, an effect using the image display device 5, the speaker 8, or the lamp 9 may be executed simultaneously. In step S532, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern of the effect device including the effect of the first effect movable unit 352 based on the variation pattern. The set effect control pattern may not include the effect of the first effect movable unit 352.

Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets an initial value of the effect control process timer of the process data of the effect control pattern set in step S532 (step S534), starts the effect control process timer (step S535), and step In accordance with the contents of the process data set in S532, the rendering device (production component) such as the image display device 5 is controlled (step S536). In step S536, when the effect control pattern including the effect of the first effect moving part 352 is set in step S532, the effect using the first effect moving part 352 is executed. The reach effect described later with reference to FIG. 44 is started in step S536.
Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command (the special diagram variation time shown in FIG. 5) in the variation time timer (step S537).

Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 clears the first start prize reception command buffer 194A or the second start prize reception command buffer 194B (step S538). Specifically, when the variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the first special game, the effect control CPU 120 is the most of the commands associated with the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. The command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smaller buffer number is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (first start opening prize designation) The command associated with the command is shifted while maintaining the winning order, and when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, the command is stored in the second starting winning reception command buffer. Delete the command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands being The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the removed command is shifted while maintaining the winning order.In the process of step S538, according to the deletion or shift of the command, The information stored in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C or the second prefetch notice buffer 194D provided in the RAM 122 is also deleted or shifted, and then the value of the production process flag corresponds to the production processing during variable display. After the value is updated to “2” (step S539), the variable display start setting process is terminated.
Above, description of the variable display start process of step S171 using FIG. 27 is complete | finished.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the variable display effect process in step S <b> 172 executed in the effect control process process of step S <b> 75 in FIG. 25 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display effect process.
In the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 30, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control process timer (step S601), and subtracts 1 from the value of the variation time timer (step S602). The variable time timer is a timer for measuring the fluctuation time, and is a special figure fluctuation time set in accordance with each fluctuation pattern described in FIG.

After executing the processing of step S602, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control process timer has timed out. (Step S603). When the production control process timer times out (step S603; YES), the production control CPU 120 sets the production control process timer set value of the next process data in the production control pattern set in step S532, and produces the production. The control process timer is started (step S604), and the rendering device control process is executed according to the content of the next process data (step S605). The effect device control process in step S605 starts the effect according to each process data, and is repeatedly executed until the process timer times out and the effect device control process based on the next process data is started. Shall be. In other words, when the effect control process timer has not timed out in the process of step S603, the effect device control process of step S605, which has been started, is repeatedly executed.
In the present embodiment, the effect control pattern of the first effect movable unit 352 set in step S352 is execution-controlled in the processes in steps S603 to S605.

On the other hand, if the effect control process timer has not timed out (step S603; NO), or after executing the process of step S605, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable time timer has timed out (step S606). ). When the variable time timer has timed out (step S606; YES), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “3” which is a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (step S607). The effect process during variable display is terminated.
On the other hand, when the variable time timer has not timed out (step S606; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the variable display effect processing without updating the value of the effect process flag.
This is the end of the description of the variable display effect processing in step S172 using FIG.

Next, the waiting process per special figure will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the special figure waiting process executed in step S173 of the effect control process (step S75) shown in FIG.
In the special symbol waiting process (step S173) shown in FIG. 29, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the stop symbol display flag indicating that the confirmed decorative symbol is displayed is set (step S651). .

  If the stop symbol display flag is not set (step S651; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines in step S524, step S525, or step S528 of the variable display start setting process (step S171) shown in FIG. Control is performed to stop and display the confirmed decorative symbol (out-of-line symbol, big hit symbol, or small hit symbol) (step S652). The effect control CPU 120 may perform control to stop and display the confirmed decorative symbol in response to the reception of the symbol confirmed command from the game control microcomputer 100.

  On the other hand, if the stop symbol display flag is set (step S651; YES), the production control CPU 120 proceeds to step S657. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when a big hit symbol is displayed as a decorative symbol stop symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set (step S656), and after receiving a hit start designation command (fanfare command), in step S658. The stop symbol display flag is reset. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set in step S651 is a stage where the fanfare effect has not yet been executed although the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, so the process of displaying the decorative symbol stop symbol in step S652 Without moving to step S657.

Subsequent to step S652, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the stop symbol is a big hit symbol (step S653). If the stop symbol is not a big hit symbol (step S653; NO), the game state setting process at the time of change is executed (step S654). In the game state setting process at the time of change, for example, the state of one or both of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag is determined by checking the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 and the like. This is a process for determining whether or not the current gaming state is a low probability low base state.
After executing the process of step S654, the CPU 120 for effect control updates the value of the effect process flag to “0”, which is a value corresponding to the variable display start wait process (step S655), and waits for the special figure in step S173. The process ends.

  When the stop symbol display flag is set (step S651; YES), or after the processing of step S656 is executed, that is, when the stop symbol is a big hit symbol, the effect control CPU 120 starts a hit. It is determined whether a designated command (fanfare command) has been received (step S657). If the hit start designation command (fanfare command) has not been received (step S657; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the special figure waiting process without updating the value of the effect process flag.

  On the other hand, when the hit start designation command (fanfare command) is received (step S657; YES), the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S658). By resetting the stop symbol display flag, it is determined in step S651 that the stop symbol display flag is not set (step S651; NO), and the process of displaying the decorative symbol stop symbol in step S652 is executed. Will be able to.

  Subsequent to step S658, the effect control CPU 120 selects process data corresponding to the fanfare effect (step S664), and starts an effect control process timer (step S665). That is, the production control CPU 120 sets the production control pattern corresponding to the hit start designation command (fanfare command) as a use pattern, sets the initial value of the production control process timer of the process data of the set production control pattern, Start the production control process timer. Thereby, a fanfare effect is executed. Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the big hit start process (step S666), and ends the special figure waiting process.

The effect control pattern of the fanfare effect set in the process of step S664 may include process data indicating the control content of the effect operation of the first effect movable unit 352. That is, in the case of performing an effect using the first effect movable unit 352 in the fanfare effect, an effect control pattern including the effect operation of the first effect movable unit 352 is selected in step S664.
This is the end of the description of the special figure waiting process in step S173 using FIG.

Next, the gaming state setting process at the time of variation in step S654 will be described using FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the gaming state setting process at the time of change executed in step S654 of the waiting process per special figure (step S173) shown in FIG.
In the game state setting process at the time of change shown in FIG. 30 (step S654), the effect control CPU 120 checks the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 described in FIG. Thus, the state of one or both of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag is determined, and it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the low probability low base state (step S701). When both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are in the off state, that is, in the low probability low base state (normal state) (step S701; YES), the effect control CPU 120 ends the variation gaming state setting process as it is. To do. On the other hand, when one or both of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are in the on state, that is, when the low accuracy high base state, the high accuracy high base state, and the high accuracy low base state (step S701; NO), the effect control counter The value of the effect number counter stored in the setting unit 193 is updated, for example, by adding 1 (step S702).

  Note that the effect number counter on the effect control board 12 side is the effect number counter on the effect control board 12 side in the same manner that the fluctuation number counter on the main board 11 side counts the number of STs (probable change number) and the number of time reductions on the main board 11 side. It is assumed that the number of STs (probability variation) and the number of time reductions are counted. In this embodiment, separately from the main board 11 side, the number of STs (probability change number) and the number of time reductions are set also on the production control board 12 side (specifically, after the big hit end processing shown in FIG. 25) (In step S177, the number of STs (probable variation) and the number of time reductions are set). In other words, in the present embodiment, the number of STs (the number of times of probability variation) and the number of time reductions are managed on the side of the effect control board 12 in addition to the main board 11 side.

  Subsequent to the process of step S702, the CPU 120 for effect control reads the ST number (probability change number) set in the post-hit end post-processing (step S177) shown in FIG. 25 (step S703), and the big hit end post-process (step S177). ) Is read out (step S704).

Subsequent to the processing in step S704, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation state) (step S705). The effect control CPU 120 determines that the current gaming state is the high probability state when the probability variation flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is in the on state. In step S705, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the high probability state (step S705; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the value of the effect number counter is based on the ST number (probability change number) read in step S703. It is determined whether or not the value is larger than the indicated value (for example, 70 times) (step S706). When it is determined that the value of the effect number counter is larger than the value indicated by the ST number (the number of times of probability change) (step S706; YES), the effect control CPU 120 has a probability change flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. Is turned off, and the gaming state is set to the low probability state (step S707).
Here, setting to the low-accuracy state changes the state recognized by the CPU 120 for effect control (information such as a probability change flag stored on the effect control board 12 side) and is recognized by the CPU 103. The state (information such as the probability variation flag stored on the main board 11 side) related to the determination of whether or not to make a big hit is not changed.

If it is determined that the current gaming state is not the high probability state after executing the process of step S707 (step S705; NO), or the value of the production number counter is not larger than the value indicated by the ST number (probability variation number). (Step S706; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the high base state (short time state) (step S708). The effect control CPU 120 determines that the current gaming state is the high base state (short time state) when the time reduction flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is in the on state. In step S708, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the high base state (short time state) (step S708; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the value of the effect number counter is based on the short time count read in step S704. It is determined whether or not the value is larger than the indicated value (for example, 70 times) (step S709). When it is determined whether the value of the production number counter is larger than the value indicated by the number of time reductions (for example, 70 times) (step S709; YES), the production control CPU 120 sets the production control flag. The short time flag provided in the unit 191 is turned off, and the gaming state is set to the low base state (step S710).
Note that setting to the low base state here changes the state recognized by the CPU 120 for effect control (information such as the time flag stored on the effect control board 12 side) and is recognized by the CPU 103. In other words, the state related to the determination as to whether or not to make a big hit (information such as a time-short flag stored on the main board 11 side) is not changed.

  After executing the process of step S710, when the current gaming state is not the high base state (short time state) (step S708; NO), it is determined that the value of the performance number counter is not larger than the value indicated by the short time number In the case (step S709; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current gaming state has become the normal state (low probability low base state), that is, as in step S701, the probability variation flag is in the off state and the time is shortened. It is determined whether or not the flag is off (step S711).

  When it is determined in step S711 that the low-probability / low-base state has been reached (step S711; YES), the effect control CPU 120 clears the set value of the ST count (number of times of probability change) to “0” (step S712). The set value of the number of times is cleared to “0” (step S713), and further, the value of the effect number counter is cleared to “0” (step S714).

After executing the process of step S714 or when it is determined in step S711 that the low probability low base state has not been reached (step S711; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the variation gaming state setting process of step S654. To do.
Above, description of the game state setting process at the time of a fluctuation | variation of step S654 using FIG. 30 is complete | finished.

Next, the big hit starting process in step S174 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit start process executed in step S174 of the effect control process (step S75) shown in FIG.
In the big hit starting process shown in FIG. 31 (step S174), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the big winning opening open notification command has been received, that is, whether or not the round 1 start timing has come (step 1). S751). When the notification command during opening of the big prize opening is not received (step S751; NO), that is, when it is not the start timing of round 1, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process timer to 1. Subtraction is performed (step S753). Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices (the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n (step S754). Thereby, before the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened, the big hit symbol is displayed and the fanfare effect is executed.

Subsequently, when the effect control process timer times out (step S756; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect control process of the next process data in the effect control pattern set in step S664. The set value of the timer is set, the production control process timer is started (step S757), and the production device (production component) such as the image display device 5 is controlled according to the contents of the next process data (step S758). .
When an effect control pattern for performing an effect using the first effect movable unit 352 is set in the process of step S664, an effect using the first effect movable unit 352 is executed in the process of steps S756 to S758. . After executing the process of step S758, the effect control CPU 120 ends the jackpot start process.

When the notification command during opening of the big prize opening is received (step S751; YES), that is, when the start timing of round 1 is reached, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect during round. (Step S761).
The effect control pattern of the effect during the round set in the process of step S761 may include process data indicating the control content of the effect operation of the first effect movable unit 352. In other words, when an effect mode using the first effect movable unit 352 is executed in the effect during the round, an effect control pattern including the effect operation of the first effect movable unit 352 is selected in step S761.

  After executing step S761, the effect control CPU 120 starts an effect control process timer (step S763). The effect control CPU 120 starts the effect control process timer by setting the initial value of the effect control process timer of the process data of the effect control pattern. Thus, the special effect or the normal effect is executed when the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the open state in the big hit gaming state.

After executing the process of step S763, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “5”, which is a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S764), and ends the jackpot start process of step S174. .
Above, description of the big hit start process of step S174 using FIG. 31 is complete | finished.

Next, the in-round processing in step S175 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the in-round processing executed in step S175 of the effect control process (step S75) shown in FIG.
In the in-round process (step S175) shown in FIG. 32, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the notification command after opening the big winning opening has been received, that is, the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state in the big hit gaming state. It is determined whether or not the start timing of the period (interval period) is reached (step S801). After the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5” corresponding to the processing during the round in step S764 in FIG. 31, the period before receiving the notification command after opening the big prize opening (step S801; NO) is , During the jackpot round. The processes in steps S802 to S808 are processes executed during the big hit round.

  When the notification command after the special winning opening is not received (step S801; NO), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control process timer (step S803). Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device according to the contents of the process data n selected in step S761 or step S762 in FIG. 31 (step S804).

After executing the process of step S804, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control process timer has timed out (step S806). When the effect control process timer times out (step S806; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the setting value of the effect control process timer of the next process data in the effect control pattern set in step S761, The production control process timer is started (step S807), and the production device such as the image display device 5 is controlled according to the contents of the next process data (step S808).
When an effect control pattern for performing an effect using the first effect movable unit 352 is set in the process of step S761, an effect using the first effect movable unit 352 is executed in the processes of step S806 to step S808. . After executing the process of step S808, the effect control CPU 120 ends the in-round process of step S175.

On the other hand, when the notification command after opening the big prize opening is received (step S801; YES), that is, when it is the start timing of the interval period, the effect control CPU 120 provides the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect after the round. Is set (step S811). The effect control pattern corresponding to the effect after round set in step S810 includes process data for controlling the effect device according to the effect mode executed during the interval period, for example.
The effect control pattern of the effect during the round set in the process of step S811 may include process data indicating the control content of the effect operation of the first effect movable unit 352. That is, in the case where an effect mode using the first effect movable unit 352 is executed in the post-round effect, an effect control pattern including the effect operation of the first effect movable unit 352 is selected in step S811.

  After executing the process of step S811, the effect control CPU 120 starts an effect control process timer (step S813). The effect control CPU 120 starts the effect control process timer by setting the initial value of the effect control process timer of the process data of the effect control pattern selected in the process of step S811 or step S812. As a result, an effect corresponding to the effect control process is executed when the interval period is reached in the big hit gaming state.

After executing the process of step S813, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “6”, which is a value corresponding to the post-round process (step S814), and ends the in-round process of step S175. .
Above, description of the process in round of step S175 using FIG. 32 is complete | finished.

Next, the accessory 300 will be described with reference to FIGS.
33A is a front view showing an accessory, and FIG. 33B is a perspective view showing a state in which the accessory is viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 34A is a perspective view showing a state where the effect movable body has moved to the lower position, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view showing operation modes of the first effect movable body and the second effect movable body. . FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the accessory is viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the accessory is viewed from obliquely behind. 37A is a front view showing a state where the second gear is in the meshing position, and FIG. 37B is a front view showing a state where the second gear has moved to the meshing release position. 38A is a cross-sectional view showing a state where the holding member is in the holding position, and FIG. 38B is a cross-sectional view showing a state where the holding member is moved to the holding release position. FIG. 39 is a schematic diagram illustrating a state in which the effect movable body is in the first upper position. FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram illustrating a state in which the effect movable body is dropped.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 to 36, the accessory 300 includes a base member 301 and an effect movable body 302 provided so as to be movable between at least an upper position and a lower position with respect to the base member 301. . The base member 301 is formed in a substantially U-shape facing downward from the front by an upper side part 301a and side parts 301b and 301c extending downward from the left and right ends of the upper side part 301a, and the upper side of the display screen of the image display device 5 And it is arrange | positioned along the left-right side.

  The effect movable body 302 corresponds to the position corresponding to the upper side portion 301a of the base member 301, that is, the upper position (see FIG. 33) above the display screen of the image display device 5, and the left and right side portions 301b and 301c. It is possible to move between a substantially center position in the vertical direction, that is, a lower position (see FIG. 34) superimposed in front of a substantially center position of the display screen of the image display device 5. It is possible to fall from the upper position to the lower position.

  In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 302 has the upper position as the initial driving position, but the lower position may be the initial driving position. In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 302 is provided so as to be able to move further upward than the upper position. That is, the upper position includes a first upper position that is the initial driving position and is held by a holding mechanism 340 described later, and a second upper position that is higher than the first upper position. Is provided so as to be movable between at least a second upper position and a lower position.

  In the present embodiment, the production movable body 302 is provided so as to be movable between the second upper position and the lower position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least the first movement body 302 is provided. As long as it can move between the 2 upper position and the lower position, it may be movable further upward than the second upper position.

  The effect movable body 302 includes a first effect movable body 303L supported to be movable up and down relative to the left side portion 301b and a second effect movable body 303L supported to be movable up and down relative to the right side portion 301c. The stage movable body 303R is configured to be movable from a lower position to an upper position by moving mechanisms 304L and 304R as moving means provided on the left and right sides of the upper side portion 301a of the base member 301, respectively. Since the first effect movable body 303L and the second effect movable body 303R are integrated in the vertical direction by the connecting rod 305 and are brought into contact with each other by the second effect motor 367, they are always at the same timing. It falls together from the upper position to the lower position.

  As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, guide rails 306 that linearly move and guide the effect movable body 302 in the vertical direction extend in the vertical direction on the left and right side portions 301b and 301c of the base member 301. . Also, below the guide rail 306, there is provided a drop regulating member 307 that abuts against the effect movable body 302 that has fallen by its own weight and regulates the downward fall. The drop regulating member 307 is made of a rubber material, a urethane resin material, or the like, and can buffer when the effect movable body 302 falls by its own weight and collides.

  Next, the moving mechanisms 304L and 304R will be described. Note that the left and right moving mechanisms 304L and 304R are configured in substantially the same manner only by being arranged symmetrically, and therefore, only the left moving mechanism 304L will be described here, and the right moving mechanism 304R is the same. Detailed description will be omitted by attaching the symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the moving mechanism 304 </ b> L includes a mounting plate 309 attached to the upper side portion 301 a of the base member 301, a first effect motor 310 fixed to the back side of the mounting plate 309, and a mounting plate. 309, a first gear 311 fixed to a drive shaft 310a protruding through the front side through 309, a second gear 312 meshed with the first gear 311, and a third gear 313 meshed with the second gear 312; A bobbin 314 as a winding unit provided integrally on the back side of the third gear 313, a constant load spring 315 that is an example of a band member that can be wound around the bobbin 314, and the second gear 312 are moved. A first effect solenoid 316 for the purpose.
A third gear 313 is formed on the bobbin 314 and is rotatable about a rotation shaft 320 protruding from the attachment plate 309 so that one end of the constant load spring 315 can be attached.

  The constant load spring 315 is a belt-like spring member having a predetermined width dimension and a predetermined length. One end is attached to the bobbin 314 and the other end is a first effect movable body 303L of the effect movable body 302. Mounted on. Further, when the production movable body 302 is in the upper position, the production movable body 302 is wound around the bobbin 314 and has a length necessary for the production movable body 302 to be pulled out at least to the lower position.

  In the constant load spring 315, the return force (load) generated when it is stretched in a straight line is substantially constant regardless of the stroke, and the movable body for performance 302 is in a state where its own weight is larger than the return force of the constant load spring 315. It is supported by. In this way, when the weight of the effect movable body 302 exceeds the return force of the constant load spring 315, the effect movable body 302 can be dropped by its own weight, but the first effect motor 310 having a small output can be raised or lowered. Can be lowered.

  In the present embodiment, the production movable body 302 is supported in a state where its own weight is larger than the return force of the constant load spring 315, but the present invention is not limited to this, and its own weight is The constant force spring 315 may be supported in a balanced state with the return force. By doing so, the weight of the effect movable body 302 becomes theoretically zero, and can be raised or lowered by the first effect motor 310 with a small output.

  As shown in FIG. 37, the bobbin 314 transmits the rotational force of the drive shaft 310 a of the first effect motor 310 to the first gear 311, the second gear 312, and the third gear 313, thereby causing the rotational shaft 320 to move. It is designed to rotate around the center. The constant load spring 315 is wound around the bobbin 314 by rotating the bobbin 314 in the first direction (clockwise in front view), and the constant load spring is rotated by rotating the bobbin 314 in the second direction (counterclockwise in front view). 315 is pulled out vertically from the bobbin 314.

  The second gear 312 is rotatable about a rotation shaft 331 at one end of a rotation member 330 having a substantially inverted V shape when viewed from the front, which is supported rotatably about the drive shaft 310a of the first gear 311. Is provided. The other end of the rotation member 330 is connected to the tip of the plunger 316a of the first effect solenoid 316, and the rotation member 330 is driven around the drive shaft 310a by driving the first effect solenoid 316. It is designed to rotate.

  Specifically, when the first effect solenoid 316 is off (non-energized state), the second gear 312 is extended by the plunger 316a being urged by the urging spring 316b, and the rotating member 330 is in the first direction ( By rotating in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front, the first gear 311 and the third gear 313 are engaged with each other, and the engagement position where the rotational force of the drive shaft 310a can be transmitted to the third gear 313 is maintained ( (See FIG. 37A).

  When the first effect solenoid 316 is on (energized state), the plunger 316a contracts against the biasing force of the biasing spring 316b, and the rotating member 330 is in the second direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the front). Is rotated (moved) in a direction away from the third gear 313 and moved to a mesh release position where the rotational force of the drive shaft 310a cannot be transmitted to the third gear 313 (FIG. 37B )reference). Note that the second gear 312 is separated from the third gear 313 by moving around the first gear 311 around the drive shaft 310a, so that the second gear 312 is engaged with the first gear 311. While moving away from the third gear 313 alone.

  As described above, when the meshing state of the first gear 311, the second gear 312, and the third gear 313 is released, the bobbin 314 is in a free state separated from the driving force of the first effect motor 310. When the dead weight of the production movable body 302 exceeds the return force of the constant load spring 315, the dead weight can be dropped from the upper position to the lower position.

  As shown in FIG. 38, a holding mechanism 340 is provided on the upper side of the side portion 301b of the base member 301 as a holding means for holding the effect movable body moved to the upper position at the upper position. Yes. The holding mechanism 340 is connected via a second effect solenoid 341 attached with the plunger 341a facing downward and a connecting member 342 attached to the tip of the plunger 341a, and is provided to be movable in the front-rear direction. Holding member 343.

  The holding member 343 is formed with a connection groove 343a that is inclined upward toward the front side (the right side in FIG. 38), and a connection shaft 342a formed on the connection member 342 is inserted into the connection groove 343a. Yes. When the second effect solenoid 341 is off (non-energized state), the plunger 341a is urged downward and extended by the urging spring 341b, so that the connecting shaft 342a is positioned at the rear end of the connecting groove 343a. Therefore, the holding member 343 is positioned at a holding position where the holding portion 343b at the tip protrudes forward from the side portion 301b. Further, when the second effect solenoid 341 is turned on (energized state), the plunger 341a is contracted against the urging force of the urging spring 341b, so that the connecting shaft 342a is raised. The tip holding portion 343b is moved to the holding release position where it is retracted to the rear side (left side in FIG. 38).

  Since the holding member 343 is guided by the side portion 301b so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, the first effect of the effect movable body 302 on the holding portion 343b in a state where the holding member 343 is located at the holding position. When the moving movable body 303L is locked, the load of the first effect moving body 303L can be supported, and the effect moving body 302 can be held at the upper position.

  35 and 36, the first effect movable body 303L includes a guide portion 350 that moves in the vertical direction on the front side of the side portion 301b of the base member 301, and an upward direction from the top of the guide portion 350 to the right. A horizontally extending horizontal portion 351, a first effect moving portion 352 provided to be slidable in the left-right direction relative to the horizontal portion 351, and a second effect moving portion 353 provided on the back side of the first effect moving portion 352. And an auxiliary movable portion 358. The detailed structure will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  A stopper including a horizontal holding piece 354a as a held portion held by the holding portion 343b of the holding member 343 and a restriction piece 354b that comes into contact with the drop restriction member 307 at a lower position at a predetermined position of the guide portion 350. A portion 354 is provided.

  A movable rail 356 that is movably assembled to the guide rail 306 of the base member 301 is provided on the back surface of the guide portion 350. A spring attachment portion 357 to which the other end of the constant load spring 315 is attached is provided on the upper portion of the guide portion 350. Thus, in the present embodiment, the first effect movable body 303L is movable in the vertical direction with respect to the base member 301 by assembling the movable rail 356 to the guide rail 306. Further, the constant load spring 315 is attached to the base member 301, and the spring attachment portion 357 is arranged to be movable up and down just below the left side of the peripheral surface of the bobbin 314 as shown in FIG. When the body 302 falls to the lower position, the constant load spring 315 is pulled out substantially vertically downward.

  Further, in this embodiment, as a notice effect that is executed while displaying a decorative pattern, for example, an operation notice that is executed on condition that the player operates the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, a predetermined image is displayed. Step-up notice that changes in stages, serif notice that a character appears and hits the dialogue, cut-in notice that interrupts the specified image is displayed, and whether or not you will reach a big hit notice effect Reach notice to suggest, pseudo-continuous notice to notice whether or not to become a pseudo-ream, stop-design notice to notify the stop symbol, whether the game state is a probability fluctuation state (whether or not to hide) In addition to multiple announcements that are executed at the start of variable display or reach establishment, such as a latent announcement, it is executed during a big hit game. When the big hit ends, it is possible to notify the transition to a high probability state at the end of the big hit, or to re-change from the normal big hit combination to the finalized decorative symbol of the probable big hit combination at the end of the decorative symbol variation display. Various notice effects such as a promotion notice effect that informs the transition to the probability state can be executed, and the effect movable body 302 at the upper position is thus caused by its own weight at a predetermined timing of these various notice effects. A drop effect (movable effect) that drops to a lower position can be executed.

  Further, the effect movable body 302 does not always fall at the predetermined timing of these various effects. For example, in the above jackpot notice effect, when the variable display result is a big hit, the rate is higher than when lost. (For example, 100% is included), or when the reach is established in the reach notice, the drop is performed at a higher rate (for example, 100% is included) than when the reach is not established. In the notice, when the pseudo-continuation continues, it is allowed to drop at a higher rate (including 100%, for example) than when it does not continue, or when it develops to super reach, a higher rate than when it does not develop (for example, , Including 100%), and in this way, the player expects the production movable body 302 to fall. Since Uninaru can be watching a drop operation of the effect for the movable body 302.

  Moreover, the timing at which the production movable body 302 is dropped can be executed at an arbitrary timing during the execution of the above various notices, for example, at an arbitrary timing such as when reach is achieved or when it is developed into super reach. The timing at which the player operates the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B may be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, for example, when the drop condition of the effect movable body 302 is satisfied as an effect pattern of the super reach effect executed by the effect control CPU 120 (for example, the push button 31B is operated within the operation effective period). A first effect pattern for dropping the effect movable body 302 from the upper position to the lower position when the operation effective period has elapsed without being operated within the operation effective period, and the effect movable body 302 One of the plurality of types of effect patterns including the second effect pattern that does not cause the effect movable body 302 to fall from the upper position to the lower position even if the drop condition is satisfied is determined.

  Specifically, the CPU 120 for effect control specifies the display result of the decorative design based on the set change pattern at the start of the change display, and executes the super reach effect based on the specified display result. The presence / absence and the execution pattern are determined to be one of a plurality. For example, when the variable display result is a big hit, the first effect pattern is determined as the super reach effect pattern at a higher rate (including 100%, for example) than when the variable display result is lost, and the variable display result Is lost, the second effect pattern is determined as the super reach effect pattern at a higher rate (including the rate of 100%, for example) than when the variable display result is a big hit.

  Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 determines a predetermined timing (for example, when the push button 31B is operated within the operation effective period) before the fall condition is satisfied, regardless of whether the first effect pattern or the second effect pattern is determined. Alternatively, the bobbin 314 is rotated by the first effect motor 310 at a first upper position by rotating the bobbin 314 by the first effect motor 310 at a timing before the operation effective period elapses without being operated within the operation effective period. To the second upper position. In this way, the player predicts whether or not the production movable body 302 will fall depending on whether or not the production movable body 302 rises from the first upper position to the second upper position at a predetermined timing. It can be avoided.

  Next, the operation control of each part executed by the effect control CPU 120 when the effect movable body 302 is dropped or raised will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the effect movable body 302 is held at the first upper position in the initial driving state. At this time, the holding piece 354a of the first effect movable body 303L is locked to the holding portion 343b of the holding member 343, and the load of the effect moving body 302 is supported by the holding member 343, whereby the effect moving body 302 is provided. Is held in the first upper position.

  In this state, the first effect motor 310 for winding the constant load spring 315, the first effect solenoid 316 for moving the second gear 312 and the second effect solenoid 341 for holding are respectively off (non-energized). State).

  When a fall effect for dropping the effect movable body 302 is started based on the first effect pattern described above, the left bobbin 314 is moved in the first direction (front view clock) by the first effect motor 310 before the fall timing is reached. The effect movable body 302 is raised from the first upper position to the second upper position. Accordingly, the holding piece 354a of the first effect movable body 303L is lifted from the holding portion 343b of the holding member 343.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 39, when it is time to drop the effect movable body 302, the first effect motor 310 is first turned off (non-energized state), and the first effect solenoid 316 and second The production solenoid 341 is turned on (energized state). As a result, the second gear 312 rotates from the mesh position to the mesh release position, and the holding member 343 retracts to the hold release position. Further, since the connection between the effect movable body 302 and the first effect motor 310 is released and the free state is brought about, the effect movable body 302 passes its own weight from the second upper position to the lower position. It falls by.

  Further, when the second gear 312 rotates from the meshing position to the meshing release position, the first effect motor 310 is preferably turned off (non-energized state). In other words, the first effect motor 310 moves in the winding direction of the first effect motor 310 while the effect movable body 302 is raised from the first upper position to the second upper position and held at the second upper position. It becomes the state which regulates the fall of the production movable body 302 by the rotational driving force. Therefore, since the tooth portion of the second gear 312 and the tooth portion of the third gear 313 are strongly pressed, the engagement of the second gear 312 with the third gear 313 is released by the force of the second effect solenoid 341. It becomes difficult.

  Therefore, when the first effect motor 310 is turned off (non-energized state), the first gear 311, the second gear 312, and the third gear 313 are all in a rotation-free state, and the third gear 313 is dropped. Since the rotation in the direction is permitted by the rotation of the second gear 312 and the first gear 311, the second gear 312 is easily rotated to the meshing release position with respect to the third gear 313.

  In the present embodiment, the first effect solenoid 316 and the second effect solenoid 341 are turned on (energized state) simultaneously with the first effect motor 310 being turned off (non-energized state). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the first effect motor 310 is turned off (non-energized state), the first effect solenoid 316 and the second effect solenoid 341 are turned on (energized state). You may make it.

  In addition, the first production solenoid 316 and the second production solenoid 341 are turned on (energized state) at the same time as the first production motor 310 is turned off (non-energized state). However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the first effect motor 310 is turned off (non-energized state), or simultaneously after being turned off (non-energized state), the second effect solenoid 341 is turned on and the effect movable body 302 is turned on. After releasing the holding state, the first effect solenoid 316 may be turned on to move the second gear 312 to the mesh release position. Further, when the first effect motor 310 is turned off (non-energized state) or at the same time (off), the first effect solenoid 316 is turned on and the second gear 312 is moved to the mesh release position. Therefore, the second production solenoid 341 may be turned on to release the holding state of the production movable body 302.

  In addition, after the first effect motor 310 raises the effect movable body 302 from the first upper position to the second upper position, the second effect solenoid 341 is turned on (energized state), and the holding member 343 is moved from the holding position. Retracted to the holding release position. That is, since the holding member 343 is retracted from the holding position to the holding release position in a state in which the load of the effect movable body 302 is not applied to the holding portion 343b, the holding member 343 can be moved with a small force. It can be moved to the holding release position.

  Next, after the effect movable body 302 falls to the lower position, the second effect solenoid 341 is turned off (non-energized state), the holding member 343 is returned to the holding position, and the first effect solenoid 316 is turned off (non-energized). State), the second gear 312 is returned to the meshing position.

  In this embodiment, after the holding member 343 is returned to the holding position, the second gear 312 is returned to the meshing position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second gear 312 is returned to the meshing position. After returning, the holding member 343 may be returned to the holding position, and the timing for returning the second gear 312 to the meshing position and the timing for returning the holding member 343 to the holding position may be simultaneous. Further, the holding member 343 may be returned to the holding position when a series of operations until the effect movable body 302 is dropped and then returned to the upper position is completed. Further, after the holding member 343 is moved from the holding position to the holding release position and the effect movable body 302 is dropped, the holding member 343 is held from the hold release position before the effect moving body 302 reaches the lower position. You may return to the position.

  Also, in this embodiment, the constant load spring 315 is applied as an example of the band member, so that the bobbin 314 can be used when the effect movable body 302 falls to the lower position against the return force of the constant load spring 315. The constant load spring 315 pulled out from is applied with a force to rewind the bobbin 314, so that the pulled out constant load spring 315 is not bent or twisted. In addition, since the bias of the winding is suppressed, the constant load spring 315 that has been wound even during the fall is pulled out smoothly, so that stopping or rattling during the fall is suppressed.

  Then, when the effect by the effect movable body 302 at the lower position is finished, when returning to the first upper position, the first effect motor 310 is turned on (energized state) and the bobbin 314 is turned in the first direction (clockwise in front view). ) To rotate. Thereby, the constant load spring 315 is wound around the bobbin 314, and the effect movable body 302 is raised. At this time, since the winding force by the constant load spring 315 works, it can be raised with a small force. When the position sensor (not shown) detects that the effect movable body 302 has reached the first upper position, the first effect motor 310 is turned off (non-energized state).

  When the effect movable body 302 rises from the lower position to the first upper position, even if the holding member 343 protrudes to the hold position, the first effect movable body 303L is formed on the tapered surface formed at the lower portion of the holding portion 343b. The holding piece 354a is allowed to pass by contacting the holding piece 354a and pushing the holding member 343 rearward against the urging force of the urging spring 341b while moving upward. Then, after passing, the holding member 343 returns to the holding position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 341b, whereby the holding piece 354a is locked to the holding portion 343b, and the first effect movable body 303L is held at the first upper position. The fall effect ends.

  Next, based on the second effect pattern described above, when a drop effect for dropping the effect movable body 302 is started, the left bobbin 314 is first moved by the first effect motor 310 before the fall timing is reached. The effect movable body 302 is raised from the first upper position to the second upper position by rotating in the direction (clockwise in front view). Thereby, as shown in the enlarged view in FIG. 12, the holding piece 354a of the first effect movable body 303L is lifted from the holding portion 343b of the holding member 343.

  Next, when it is time to drop the movable body for production 302, the first production motor 310 remains on (energized state), and the first production solenoid 316 and the second production solenoid 341 are also off (non-energized). State). That is, the effect movable body 302 rises from the first upper position to the second upper position, and then drops from the second upper position to the lower position through the first upper position by its own weight without moving to the second upper position. Retained.

  Then, after the predetermined period has elapsed, when the first effect motor 310 is turned off (non-energized state), the effect movable body 302 falls from the second upper position to the first upper position, and is held by the holding member 343. It is held in the first upper position. Furthermore, after a predetermined period has elapsed, the fall effect ends.

  Thus, for example, in the state where the production movable body 302 is held at the first upper position, the player can visually recognize from the player side, and from the first upper position before dropping from the first upper position to the lower position. When an operation of slightly raising the second movable position is performed, even when the second production pattern is executed in which the production movable body 302 is not dropped at the fall timing, before the fall timing at which the production movable body 302 is dropped. As in the case of the first effect pattern, the effect movable body 302 is raised from the first upper position to the second upper position (a common effect is also executed in the image display device 5 and the like). It can be made difficult to predict whether or not the movable body 302 will be dropped.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention, the movable movable body 302 for production as a movable body provided to be movable at least between an upper position and a lower position, and a width A constant load spring 315 as a band member having a dimension L1 and attached to the production movable body 302, and a bobbin 314 as a winding unit for winding the constant load spring 315, the production movable body 302 having its own weight. The constant load spring 315 is wound around the bobbin 314 when the effect movable body 302 moves to the upper position.

  In the present embodiment, as an example of the band member, the constant load spring 315 that is a spring member that biases the effect movable body 302 upward is applied, so that the effect movable body 302 is positioned at the upper position. Therefore, even a motor with a small output can be raised. Moreover, since the ascent is always assisted with a constant force from the lower position to the upper position, the belt member itself has a winding force, so that the belt member itself has a winding force. Since it is not necessary to provide an urging member such as a spring member that supports the raising of the effect movable body 302 other than the member, the structure is simplified.

  In this embodiment, the constant load spring 315 is applied as an example of the band member. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a spring member other than the constant load spring (for example, a spring spring or the like) is used. There may be. Furthermore, a belt member such as a cloth or a rubber material that does not have a winding force such as a spring may be applied. When a spring member other than the constant load spring is applied as described above, an urging member such as a spring member that supports rising of the effect movable body 302 may be provided separately.

  In this embodiment, the bobbin 314 is applied as an example of the winding unit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a cylindrical member, a pulley, or the like.

  The effect moving body 302 includes a first effect moving body 303L as a first moving body and a second effect moving body 303R as a second moving body, and the first effect moving body 303L and the first effect moving body 303L. Since the movable body for effect 3R is dropped to the lower position at the same timing and moved to the upper position at the same timing, the rendering effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, since the first effect movable body 303L and the second effect movable body 303R are brought into contact with each other by the second effect motor 367, the moving mechanisms 304L and 304R are provided separately. Even if it is, it goes up and down at the same timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first effect movable body 303L and the second effect movable body 303R may be connected to each other by the connecting rod 305.

  In the present embodiment, the production movable body 302 has the first production movable body 303L and the second production movable body 303R, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be comprised only of this movable body, and may be comprised by the 3 or more several movable body.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect movable body 302 is positioned above the image display device 5 at the upper position, and is superimposed on the front surface of the image display device 5 by dropping to the lower position. The present invention is not limited to this, and the production movable body 302 may be provided so as to be movable up and down at a position not related to the image display device 5 on the back side of the transparent game board, for example.

  Further, the first gear 311, the second gear 312, and the third gear 313 that transmit the rotational force of the first effect motor 310, and at least one of the first gear 311, the second gear 312, and the third gear 313. As a gear member moving means for moving a gear member (for example, the second gear 312) between a meshing position for meshing with another gear member (for example, the third gear 313) and a meshing release position for releasing the meshing. A first effect solenoid 316 and a rotation member 330, the second gear 312 is positioned at the meshing position, the rotational force of the first effect motor 310 is transmitted by a plurality of gear members, and a constant load is applied by the bobbin 314. By winding the spring 315, the effect movable body 302 is moved to the upper position, and the second gear 312 is moved to the mesh release position by the first effect solenoid 316 and the rotating member 330. It is to, to drop by its own weight the effect for the movable body 302 of the upper position to the lower position.

  In this way, when the effect movable body 302 is dropped from the upper position, the connection with the first effect motor 310 can be released, and therefore the effect movable by the load of the first effect motor 310. It can suppress that the force to the falling direction of the body 302 becomes weak.

  In the present embodiment, the second gear 312 of the first gear 311, the second gear 312 and the third gear 313 can be moved between the meshing position and the meshing release position. However, the present invention is not limited to this. However, it is only necessary that at least one of the plurality of gear members is movable, and the first gear 311 and the third gear 313 may be movably provided instead of the second gear 312. . Furthermore, not only the second gear 312 but also a plurality of gear members may be provided so as to be movable relative to other gear members.

  In the present embodiment, the second gear 312 is not released from meshing with the first gear 311 even if it moves from the meshing position to the meshing release position. Since it is only necessary to mesh with the third gear 313 that is a member, meshing is performed smoothly. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the mesh position is moved from the mesh position to the mesh release position. By doing so, the meshing state with two or more gear members may be released.

  Further, the gear member moving means is not limited to the solenoid, but may be driven by another drive source such as a motor, or the first effect motor 310 or the like for raising the moving body. An interlocking mechanism that interlocks with the drive source may be used.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the second gear 312 has been moved from the meshing position to the meshing release position by rotation about the drive shaft 310a that is the rotational axis of the first gear 311. As described above, the engagement with the first gear 311 is not released, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement from the engagement position to the engagement release position is not limited to the rotation. There may be a linear movement. Moreover, it is not limited to the movement to the direction away from the surrounding surface of the gear member used as object, You may make it move to the axial center direction of a gear member.

  In addition, a holding mechanism 340 is provided as holding means for holding the effect movable body 302 that has moved to the first upper position at the first upper position, and the effect movable body 302 at the first upper position is dropped by its own weight. Sometimes, it is moved from the first upper position to the second upper position further upward, and the holding by the holding mechanism 340 is released.

  By doing so, the holding can be smoothly released in a state where the load of the effect movable body 302 is not applied to the holding member 343 which is the holding mechanism 340.

  In this embodiment, when the effect movable body 302 is dropped, the holding member 343 is moved from the holding position to the holding release position after being moved from the first upper position to the second upper position. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the holding member 343 may be moved obliquely upward from the holding position toward the holding release position, or the friction between the holding portion 343b and the holding piece 354a. Friction reducing means (not shown) such as a roller for reducing the resistance is provided so that the holding member 343 can be smoothly moved to the holding release position even when the effect movable body 302 is loaded. Or you may.

  Further, in this embodiment, the moving mechanism that raises the production movable body 302 from the lower position to the first upper position and the moving mechanism that raises the first movable position from the first upper position to the second upper position are the same moving mechanism. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a separate moving mechanism may be used.

  In this embodiment, the moving mechanisms 304L and 304R that raise the production movable body 302 from the lower position to the first upper position are raised by winding the constant load spring 315 by the bobbin 314. The present invention is not limited to this, and the moving mechanism may be configured by separate moving mechanisms such as a rack and a pinion, for example.

  In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 302 is controlled to be moved by the effect control CPU 120, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement may be controlled by the CPU 103. In this case, the CPU 103 outputs control information (command) indicating the state of the moving body to the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120, based on the received control information (command). For example, the production may be performed at the same time.

  In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 302 always drops from the upper position to the same lower position when executing the drop effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be possible to drop in stages. That is, the lower position below the upper position includes a plurality of lower positions including a first lower position and a second lower position having a longer distance from the upper position than the first lower position, and can fall to each of these lower positions. It is good.

  In this case, for example, when the fluctuation display result is a big hit, it falls to the second lower position at a higher rate (including a ratio of 100%, for example) than when the fluctuation display result is lost, and the fluctuation display If the result is lost, it may be dropped to the first lower position at a higher rate (including a rate of 100%, for example) than when the fluctuation display result is a big hit, and in this way, Since the player expects the production movable body 302 to fall further downward, the production effect is improved.

  Next, the detailed structure of the effect movable body 302 will be described. The first effect movable body 303L and the second effect movable body 303R constituting the effect movable body 302 have a symmetrical configuration, and the basic configuration is the same. Therefore, in the following description, the structure details of the first effect movable body 303L will be mainly described. In addition, about the code | symbol showing the structural member of the movable body 303L for 1st effects, L is added suitably (for example, like the horizontal part 351L), and about the code | symbol showing the structural member of the 1st effect movable body 303R. Suppose that R is added appropriately (for example, as in the horizontal portion 351R). FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view showing the first effect movable body of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. As described above, the first effect movable body 303L includes the guide portion 350L that moves the base member 301 (FIG. 35) in the vertical direction, the horizontal portion 351L that extends from the upper portion of the guide portion 350L to the right, and the horizontal A first effect movable portion 352L provided to be slidable in the left-right direction with respect to the portion 351L, a second effect moveable portion 353L (FIG. 42) provided on the back side of the first effect moveable portion 352L, and a third effect The movable portion 358L is mainly included.

  The first effect movable portion 352L is combined with the base plate 360, the LED board 361 provided on the front surface of the base plate 360, the diffusion plate 362 provided in front of the LED board 361, and the base plate 360. A decoration plate 363 that accommodates the LED substrate 361 and the diffusion plate 362 is provided.

  The base plate 360 is slidably attached to the horizontal portion 351L in the left-right direction. As will be described later, a second effect moving part 353L (FIG. 42) simulating three fingers and a third effect moving part 358L simulating one finger are slidable on the rear surface of the base plate 360. It is attached. The second effect moving part 353L and the third effect moving part 358L are biased by a spring (not shown), and when the base plate 360 slides to the left, the second effect moving part 358L protrudes from the right end of the base plate 360 to the front surface.

  The LED substrate 361 has a plurality of LEDs 364. These LEDs 364 perform a lighting operation and a blinking operation in accordance with the effect operation of the accessory 300. Thereby, the production effect of the accessory 300 can be enhanced. The LED 364 is controlled by an output from the lamp control board 14 and performs lighting / extinguishing / flashing operations.

  The diffusion plate 362 is made of, for example, a synthetic resin having translucency, and is provided in front of the LED substrate 361. A plurality of irregularities are regularly formed on the surface of the diffusion plate 362. Light incident on the diffusion plate 362 from the LED 364 is diffused by a plurality of irregularities formed on the surface. Thereby, the light from the LED 364 which is a point light source is emitted from the diffusion plate 362 as diffused light, and the unevenness of brightness generated in the emitted light is visually recognized by the player as a pattern.

  The decorative plate 363 is attached to the base plate 360 and constitutes the front surface of the first effect movable portion 352L. The decorative plate 363 is made of, for example, a synthetic resin having translucency, and emits light incident from the diffusion plate 362 to the outside. A design (not shown) unique to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided on the surface of the decorative board 363, and the decorative board 363 itself is formed in a shape unique to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Thereby, the design applied to the decoration board 363 and the shape of the decoration board 363 itself are irradiated from the back by the light emitted from the LED 364. Thereby, at the time of production of the accessory 300, the appearance of the first production movable part 352L can be improved.

  FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of a part of the first effect movable body of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention as seen from the rear. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of a part of the first effect movable body shown in FIG. 42 as seen from the front. 42 and 43, a part of the first effect movable body shown in FIG. 41 is not shown, such as the LED board 361 disassembled and shown as a single member.

  On the rear surface of the horizontal portion 351L, a connecting rod locking portion to which one end of a connecting rod 305 (FIG. 35) that connects the first effect movable body 303L and the second effect movable body 303R (FIG. 35) is locked. 365 is attached by screws 366. The connecting rod 305 (FIG. 35) is inserted into a connecting rod insertion hole 365a (FIG. 42) formed in the connecting rod locking portion 365, and one end thereof is locked by a locking member (not shown). Thus, the first effect movable body 303L and the second effect movable body 303R can be integrated. An effect motor mounting portion 368 for attaching the second effect motor 367 to the horizontal portion 351L is attached to the screw 369 on the rear surface of the horizontal portion 351L. The second effect motor 367 is attached to the effect motor mounting portion 368 with a screw 370.

  The second effect motor 367 is, for example, a stepping motor, a DC motor, or the like, and its operation is controlled by the effect control board 12 (FIG. 2). The effect control board 12 can rotate the second effect motor 367 by a predetermined angle or make it stationary. The drive shaft 367a (FIG. 43) of the second effect motor 367 is inserted through the drive shaft insertion hole 368a formed in the effect motor mounting portion 368 and is fitted to the drive gear 371 (FIG. 42). As a result, the drive gear 371 rotates by driving the second effect motor 367.

  A driven gear 372 that meshes with the drive gear 371 is rotatably attached to the horizontal portion 351L. As a result, the drive of the second effect motor 367 is transmitted to the driven gear 372. As will be described later, the driven gear 372 meshes with a rack 373 that slides with the base plate 360 in the left-right direction with respect to the horizontal portion 351L. As a result, the driven gear 372 rotates to slide the rack 373 in the left-right direction with respect to the horizontal portion 351L.

As shown in FIG. 41, a horizontal portion 351L is provided on the rear surface of the base plate 360. The horizontal portion 351L is provided with a slide hole 351a whose major axis coincides with the left-right direction. The slide hole 351a is provided with a sliding projection provided on the base plate 360 (not shown), and the sliding projection comes into contact with the end point of the slide hole 351a, so that the sliding range of the base plate 360 is limited. That is, the slide range of the base plate 360 that slides left and right by driving the second effect motor 367 is limited by the slide hole 351a.
Above, description of the accessory 300 using FIGS. 33-43 is complete | finished.

  Next, an effect using the effect movable body 302 in the reach state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating an effect mode in which the effect movable body 302 is in a separated state. 44 (a) to 44 (g) exemplify a production mode that becomes a big hit from the reach state. As described in the process of step S532 in FIG. 27, the effect mode is executed in the processes in steps S603 to S605 in FIG. 28 based on the effect control pattern set based on the variation pattern.

In FIG. 44A, on the display screen of the image display device 5, the decorative symbols are displayed in the reach state in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Specifically, it is assumed that the decorative symbol display area 5L and 5R displays the decorative symbol “7”, and the decorative symbol display area 5C is in a reach state in which 7 and 8 are alternately displayed. FIG. 44A may be, for example, a super reach with pseudo continuous fluctuation or a super reach without pseudo continuous fluctuation.
On the upper part of the image display device 5, an effect movable body 302 having a first effect movable part 352L and a first effect movable part 352R is held at a first upper position. The first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R are integrated in a contact state to form a specific shape.
Note that FIG. 43A corresponds to the effect mode in the time up to t11 described with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 43 (b) is t13 to t14, FIGS. 43 (c) and 43 (d) are t14 to t15, FIG. 43 (e) is t15 to t18, FIG. 43 (f) is t19 to t20, FIG. 43 (g). ) Corresponds to the effect mode in the time period from t21 to t21.

In FIG. 44B, the first effect movable part 352L and the first effect movable part 352R fall to a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 5 while maintaining the contact state. By dropping the first effect movable unit 352L and the first effect movable unit 352R to the lower position, substantially the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is covered with the first effect movable unit 352L and the first effect movable unit 352R. That is, the first effect movable part 352L and the first effect movable part 352R hide the variation of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.
The first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R rise to a second upper position (not shown) before dropping to the lower position. The first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R are lifted to the second upper position by the operation of the first effect motor, as described with reference to FIGS. 2 Due to the operation of the production solenoid, it falls by its own weight.
In the present embodiment, the case where the first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R cover substantially the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is exemplified. For example, the first start prize storage display area 5HL or the like The hold display in the second start winning memory display area 5HR may not be covered by the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R.

  In FIG. 44C, the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R are separated from each other in the horizontal direction from the contact state. The first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R can be opened and closed by the operation of the second effect motor 367 to change the contact state and the separation state, as described with reference to FIGS. When the first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R start to shift from the contact state to the separated state, one finger is used as a third accessory from between the first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R. A third effect movable part 358L and a third effect moveable part 358R appearing in a similar manner appear and are visible from the front. Further, as the first effect movable unit 352L and the first effect movable unit 352R are separated, the display screen of the image display device 5 gradually appears between the first effect movable unit 352L and the first effect movable unit 352R. . In other words, an effect is performed in which the first effect movable unit 352L and the first effect movable unit 352R are opened by the left and right fingers respectively placed on the contact portion between the first effect movable unit 352L and the first effect movable unit 352R. Is done.

  In FIG. 44D, when the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R are further separated as compared with the state of FIG. 44C, the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R are between. The third effect moving part 353L and the third effect moving part 353R imitating three fingers appear as the third role, and are visible from the front. The third effect movable portion 353L, the third effect moveable portion 353R, the third effect moveable portion 358L, and the third effect moveable portion 358R are opened by sliding the first effect moveable portion 352L and the first effect moveable portion 352R left and right. Rotate the fingertips to face the front. Accordingly, the left and right four fingers project to the front from the rear surface of the third effect movable portion 353L and the third effect movable portion 353R, and the first and second effect movable portions 352L and 352R are directed to the player. The effect that allows the first effect movable part 352L and the first effect movable part 352R to be visually recognized so as to be opened with a finger is executed.

In FIG. 44 (e), when the first presentation movable section 352L and the first presentation movable section 352R slide to the left and right separation limits, the third presentation movable section 353L, the third presentation movable section 353R, the third presentation movable section 358L, and The third effect movable part 358R further rotates and projects to the front.
Further, when the first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R slide to the left and right separation limits, the display screen of the image display device 5 appears on the substantially entire surface. A specific image is displayed on the image display device 5 with the drop of the effect movable body 302 and the separation of the first effect movable part 352L and the first effect movable part 352R. That is, the effect control CPU 120 executes the specific effect using the image display device 5 as the effect movable body 302 drops. In this embodiment, the case where the image of the face of a predetermined character is displayed on the image display device 5 is exemplified as the specific effect. By the specific effect, the player uses the model that imitates the fingers of the third effect movable part 353L, the third effect movable part 353R, the third effect movable part 358L, and the third effect movable part 358R as the specific effect on the image display device 5. It is possible to visually recognize the displayed character's finger as if the character's finger opened the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R, and to improve the effect of the effect. Become.
For example, a fluctuating decorative design may be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. Further, the display screen of the image display device 5 may be displayed to notify the player of a notice such as a big hit.

In FIG. 44 (f), the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R return from the separated state to the contact state again. When the first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R slide and close, the first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R project when the first effect moving part 352R slides and opens. The third effect movable part 353R, the third effect moveable part 358L, and the third effect moveable part 358R return to the original state, and are hidden behind the first effect moveable part 352L and the first effect moveable part 352R, and are visible to the player. become unable.
When the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R are closed and brought into contact, the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R start to rise.

  In FIG. 44 (g), the first effect movable part 352L and the first effect movable part 352R rise to the first upper position, and the display screen of the image display device 5 appears again. On the image display device 5 that reappears, a decorative pattern indicating a big hit is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the effect movable body 302 having the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R is a big hit when it falls to the lower position is exemplified. The setting of whether or not the fall position and the fluctuation result are big hits is arbitrary. For example, the effect movable body 302 may be dropped to the lower position only in the case of a big hit, or the effect movable body 302 may be dropped to the lower position even in the case of a loss. When the effect movable body 302 falls to the lower position, the probability of winning a big hit may be higher than the probability of losing. On the other hand, if the production movable body 302 rises from the first upper position to the second upper position and then falls to the first upper position without falling to the lower position, the probability of losing is higher than the probability of being a big hit. May be. Since the player can expect a big hit by the drop position of the production movable body 302, it is possible to improve the interest.

  In addition, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the pseudo-continuous effect, the effect movable body 302 may be dropped from the first upper position to the second upper position and then dropped to the first upper position.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the case where the specific effect which displays the image shown in FIG.44 (e) on the image display apparatus 5 is performed according to the fall of the effect movable body 302 was illustrated, However, The effect movable body 302 is shown. The specific performance associated with the fall of is not limited to this. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may output a sound effect from the speaker 8 or execute a specific effect of lighting the lamp 9 when the effect movable body 302 falls.

  In the present embodiment, the first effect movable unit 352L and the first effect moveable unit 352R are described as being opened and closed by sliding to the left and right at a constant speed. However, the first effect moveable unit 352L and the first effect moveable unit are described. The opening / closing speed of 352R may be variable. For example, when the first effect movable part 352L and the first effect movable part 352R are opened, the opening start speed as shown in FIG. 44 (c) is slowed and the speed is gradually increased. Good. Further, when opening the first effect movable part 352L and the first effect movable part 352R, an effect of opening gradually may be performed by repeating the opening and closing operation a plurality of times. When opening the first effect movable unit 352L and the first effect movable unit 352R, the character displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed in the first effect movable unit by slowing the opening start speed or repeating the opening / closing operation a plurality of times. It is possible to improve the effect of pruning 352L and the first effect movable part 352R.

  This is the end of the description of the effect using the effect movable body 302 in the reach state using FIG.

Next, referring to FIG. 45, when the second effect motor 367 is a stepping motor, the contact state between the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R is maintained by the static torque of the stepping motor. 1 is described.
FIG. 45 is a time chart showing the first embodiment in which the state is maintained by the static torque of the stepping motor. 45A to 45F show the operation of the effect movable body 302 with respect to time t and the operations of the respective actuators over time. The state of the effect movable body 302 and the like at each time will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 44 as appropriate.

  FIG. 45A is a time chart showing the up and down state of the effect movable body 302. As described above, the effect movable body 302 moves between the first upper position, the second upper position, and the lower position. The magnitude of the slope of the graph represents an ascending speed and a descending speed. That is, when the inclination of the graph is large, the moving speed of the effect movable body 302 is high.

  FIG. 45B is a time chart showing the state of separation / contact of the effect movable body 302. The first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R of the effect movable body 302 transition between the contact state and the separated state.

  FIG. 45C is a time chart showing the operating state of the first effect motor 310. In this embodiment, the case where a DC motor is used as the first effect motor 310 is illustrated. The operating states of the first effect motor 310 are an on state and an off state. That is, in this embodiment, the first effect motor 310 performs on / off control of rotation in only one direction.

  FIG. 45D is a time chart showing the operating state of the first effect solenoid 316. When the first effect solenoid 316 is in the off state, the second gear 312 and the third gear 313 are in a meshed state, and in the on state, the meshed state of the second gear 312 and the third gear 313 is released.

  FIG. 45 (e) is a time chart showing the operating state of the second effect solenoid 341. The second effect solenoid 341 holds the effect movable body 302 in the off state and releases the effect movable body 302 in the on state.

  FIG. 45 (f <b> 1) is a time chart showing the operating state of the second effect motor 367. In this embodiment, the case where a stepping motor is used as the 2nd production motor 367 is illustrated. The stepping motor shown in FIG. 45 (f1) exemplifies a case where the second effect motor 367 is controlled to be operated in three operation states in which the second effect motor 367 is rotated in the forward direction, reversely rotated, and stopped. That is, control for generating a holding torque in a stationary state is performed. As described with reference to FIG. 42, the rack 373 is slid in the left-right direction via the drive gear 371 and the driven gear 372 by the rotation of the second effect motor 367, and the first effect movable portion of the effect movable body 302 is rotated. Open and close 352L and first effect movable portion 352R. When the second effect motor 367 rotates in the forward direction, the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R move in the opening direction and shift from the contact state to the separated state. On the other hand, when the second effect motor 367 rotates in the reverse direction, the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R move in the closing direction and shift from the separated state to the contact state.

  In the period up to t11, the effect movable body 302 is held at the first upper position (FIG. 44A). At this time, the first effect motor 310 is off. Further, the first effect solenoid 316 is in an off state, and the second gear 312 and the third gear 313 are in an engaged state (FIG. 39). Further, the second effect solenoid 341 is in an off state, and the holding piece 354a is held by the holding portion 343b (FIG. 38 (a)).

  Further, during the period up to t11, the second effect motor 367 is stationary in the on state (drive state). The stepping motor can generate a holding torque by a holding current (excitation current) even when it is stationary in an on state. Therefore, the first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R can maintain the contact state by the holding torque generated by the second effect motor 367. The holding torque varies depending on the magnitude of the holding current, and the holding torque increases as the holding current is increased. On the other hand, when the holding current is increased, the amount of heat generated by the second effect motor 367 increases. In the present embodiment, for example, the holding current can be adjusted so as to generate a holding torque that can maintain the contact state with respect to a drop impact of the effect movable body 302 described later. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of heat generated from the second effect motor 367 while generating a holding torque necessary for maintaining the contact state.

In the period from t11 to t12, the effect movable body 302 rises from the first upper position to the second upper position. At this time, the first effect motor 310 is turned on to drive the first gear 311, the second gear 312, and the third gear 313 to move the first effect movable body 303 </ b> L and the first effect movable body 303 </ b> R. The effect movable body 302 is raised by raising (FIG. 35). The effect movable body 302 may be restricted so as not to rise above the second upper position by contacting the stopper at the second upper position, for example.
The first effect solenoid 316 continues to be in the off state, and the second gear 312 and the third gear 313 are in mesh (FIG. 39). Further, since the second effect motor 367 is also in the on state, the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R are maintained in contact with each other when the effect movable body 302 is raised.

  In the period from t12 to t13, the effect movable body 302 is lowered from the second upper position to a lower position that covers substantially the entire display screen of the image display device 5 (FIG. 44B).

  First, at t12, the first effect motor 310 is turned off. In the present embodiment, for example, a DC motor can be used as the first effect motor 310. When the DC motor is turned off, the rotor of the motor is easier to rotate than the stepping motor. Therefore, when the meshing state of the second gear 312 and the third gear 313 is released, and when the released meshing state is brought into the meshing state again, the second gear 312 and the rotor of the motor rotate to mesh and release. Can be performed smoothly.

  Further, at t12, the first effect solenoid 316 is turned on. When the first effect solenoid 316 is turned on, the meshing state of the second gear 312 and the third gear 313 is released, and the effect movable body 302 is disconnected from the drive of the first effect motor 310 (FIG. 40).

  Further, at t12, the second effect solenoid 341 is turned on. When the second effect solenoid 341 is turned on, the holding piece 354a is released from the holding state by the holding portion 343b. When the first effect solenoid 316 and the second effect solenoid 341 are turned on, the effect movable body 302 falls by its own weight (FIG. 38B). The effect moving body 302 that has been dropped comes into contact with the drop regulating member 307 and is held at the lower position (FIG. 40). As described above, the drop restricting member 307 is made of a buffering agent such as a rubber material or a urethane resin material, and can buffer when the effect movable body 302 falls by its own weight and collides. However, the production movable body 302 receives the impact of the corresponding fall of its own weight from the drop regulating member 307. In addition, by releasing the meshing state of the second gear 312 and the third gear 313, it is possible to prevent the impact force due to the weight drop of the effect movable body 302 from being propagated to the first effect motor 310.

  Further, at t13, the second effect motor 367 is in the on state. Therefore, when the production movable body 302 is in contact with the drop regulating member 307 due to a drop and receives an impact, the contact state between the first production movable unit 352L and the first production movable unit 352R is changed by the holding torque of the second production motor 367. Can try to maintain. Since the holding torque of the second effect motor 367 is determined by the magnitude of the holding current, the holding current necessary for maintaining the contact state between the first effect moving portion 352L and the first effect moving portion 352R in accordance with the impact caused by the drop. You may make it flow. By maintaining the contact state between the first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R, it is possible to prevent a reduction in effect.

  In the period from t14 to t15, the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R transition from the contact state to the separated state (FIGS. 44B to 44E). In the present embodiment, the case where the first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R are simply opened and closed once in the effect described in FIG.

  At t14, the second effect motor 367 starts the forward rotation operation from the stationary state. When the second effect motor 367 rotates forward, the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R shift from the contact state to the separated state. When the first effect movable part 352L and the first effect movable part 352R shift from the contact state to the separated state, the second effect movable part 353 and the auxiliary movable part 358 become the first effect movable part 352L and the first effect movable part 352R. It appears to be visible from between (FIGS. 44C to 44E).

At t15, the first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R move to the slide end by the normal rotation of the second effect motor 367. The second effect motor 367 ends the normal rotation and shifts to a stationary state. The movement of the first effect movable part 352L and the first effect movable part 352R to the slide end may be detected by a sensor provided at the slide end, for example. The second effect motor 367 may end the forward rotation operation by detection of a sensor provided at the slide end.
In the period from t15 to t16, the first effect movable unit 352L and the first effect movable unit 352R maintain the separated state, and a predetermined image is displayed as the specific effect on the display screen of the image display device 5.

  At t16, the second effect solenoid 341 is turned off so that the effect movable body 302 can be held. At t17, the first effect solenoid 316 is turned off, and the second gear 312 and the third gear 313 are engaged. The timing for turning the second effect solenoid 341 OFF and the timing for turning the first effect solenoid 316 OFF. It may be before the first effect motor is turned on at t20.

During the period from t18 to t19, the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R transition from the separated state to the contact state (FIGS. 44E to 44F).
At t18, the second effect motor 367 starts the reverse rotation operation from the stationary state. When the second effect motor 367 rotates in the reverse direction, the first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R shift from the separated state to the contact state. The fact that the first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R are in contact with each other may be detected by, for example, a sensor provided at the slide end. The second effect motor 367 may end the reverse rotation operation by detection of a sensor provided at the slide end.
When the first effect movable part 352L and the first effect movable part 352R shift from the separated state to the contact state, the second effect movable part 353 and the auxiliary movable part 358 become the first effect movable part 352L and the first effect movable part 352R. And disappears at t19 (FIGS. 44E to 44F).

In the period from t20 to t21, the effect movable body 302 rises from the lower position to the first upper position. At this time, the first effect motor 310 is turned on, and the first gear 311, the second gear 312 and the third gear 313 are driven to raise the effect movable body 302 (FIG. 35).
When the effect movable body 302 is raised to the first upper position, the holding piece 354a is held by the holding portion 343b (FIG. 38A). That is, as described in FIG. 38B, when the effect movable body 302 rises from the lower position to the first upper position, the first effect movable body 303L is formed on the tapered surface formed at the lower portion of the holding portion 343b. The holding piece 354a comes into contact and pushes the holding member 343 rearward against the urging force of the urging spring 341b. When the stage movable body 302 rises to the first upper position, when the holding piece 354a passes, the holding member 343 returns to the holding position by the urging force of the urging spring 341b, whereby the holding piece 354a is engaged by the holding portion 343b. It becomes possible to stop. At this time, the holding piece 354a does not need to be in contact with the holding portion 343b, but may be above the holding portion 343b.

At t21, the first effect motor 310 is turned off and the holding piece 354a is held in contact with the holding portion 343b, so that the effect movable body 302 is held at the first upper position.
Above, description of 1st Embodiment which maintains a contact state with the static torque of a stepping motor when the 2nd production motor 367 is a stepping motor using FIG. 45 is complete | finished.

Next, referring to FIG. 46, when the second effect motor 367 is a stepping motor, the second effect of maintaining the contact state between the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R with the static torque of the stepping motor. The embodiment will be described.
FIG. 46 is a time chart showing a second embodiment in which the state is maintained by the static torque of the stepping motor. In FIG. 46, since FIGS. 46 (a) to 46 (e) are the same as FIGS. 45 (a) to 45 (e), description of the same parts is omitted.

  46 (a) to 46 (f2) show the operation of the effect movable body 302 and the operation of each actuator over time with respect to time t.

  FIG. 46 (f <b> 2) is a time chart showing the operating state of the second effect motor 367. In this embodiment, the case where a stepping motor is used as the 2nd production motor 367 is illustrated. The stepping motor illustrated in FIG. 46 (f2) has three on-states in which the second effect motor 367 is normally turned on, reversely rotated, and stationary, and an off-state in which the holding current is cut off. The case where it is controlled in four states is illustrated. In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 46 (f2), the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 45 (f1) in that the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R also maintain the contact state by the holding torque due to the holding current. It is the same. In FIG. 46 (f2), the period during which the holding current is supplied and stopped in the on state is limited to when the effect movable body falls, and the heat generation from the second effect motor 367 is reduced while maintaining the contact state. The purpose is to let you.

  In the period up to t11, the effect movable body 302 is held at the first upper position (FIG. 44A). At this time, the states of the first effect motor 310, the first effect solenoid 316, and the second effect solenoid 341 are the same as those in FIG.

  On the other hand, in the period up to t11, the second effect motor 367 is stationary in the off state. When the stepping motor is stationary in the off state, the stepping motor generates a smaller holding torque than in the on state. For example, when the stepping motor is a PM type (Permanent Magnet type) or an HB type (Hybrid type), a detent torque is generated by the attractive force of the rotor magnet even when current is not applied. In the present embodiment, during the period up to t11, the stepping motor is stopped in an off state to reduce heat generation from the second effect motor 367, and the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect moveable portion 352R are caused by detent torque. The contact state may be maintained.

  In the period from t11 to t12, the effect movable body 302 rises from the first upper position to the second upper position. At this time, the states of the first effect motor 310, the first effect solenoid 316, and the second effect solenoid 341 are the same as those in FIG.

  At t11, the second effect motor 367 is changed from the off state to the on state, and the holding torque is generated. That is, when the production movable body 302 is turned off before the raising / lowering operation is performed, the heat generation from the second production motor 367 is reduced, and the production movable body 302 starts the raising / lowering operation (t11). It is possible to maintain the contact state between the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R by generating a holding torque.

  In the period from t12 to t13, the effect movable body 302 is lowered from the second upper position to a lower position that covers substantially the entire display screen of the image display device 5 (FIG. 44B). At this time, the states of the first effect motor 310, the first effect solenoid 316, and the second effect solenoid 341 are the same as those in FIG.

At t13, the second effect motor 367 is in the on state. Therefore, when the production movable body 302 is in contact with the drop regulating member 307 due to a drop and receives an impact, the contact state between the first production movable unit 352L and the first production movable unit 352R is changed by the holding torque of the second production motor 367. Can try to maintain. Since the holding torque of the second effect motor 367 is determined by the magnitude of the holding current, the holding current necessary for maintaining the contact state between the first effect moving portion 352L and the first effect moving portion 352R in accordance with the impact caused by the drop. You may make it flow. By maintaining the contact state between the first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R, it is possible to prevent a reduction in effect.
When the detent torque is sufficiently large, it is possible to use the detent torque instead of using the holding torque by stopping the second effect motor 367 in the ON state.

  In the period from t14 to t15, the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R transition from the contact state to the separated state (FIGS. 44B to 44E). At this time, the states of the first effect motor 310, the first effect solenoid 316, and the second effect solenoid 341 are the same as those in FIG.

  At t14, the second effect motor 367 starts the forward rotation operation from the stationary state. When the second effect motor 367 rotates forward, the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R shift from the contact state to the separated state. When the first effect movable part 352L and the first effect movable part 352R shift from the contact state to the separated state, the second effect movable part 353 and the auxiliary movable part 358 become the first effect movable part 352L and the first effect movable part 352R. It appears to be visible from between (FIGS. 44C to 44E).

At t15, the first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R move to the slide end by the normal rotation of the second effect motor 367. The second effect motor 367 ends the normal rotation and shifts to the OFF state. The second effect motor 367 may be turned off by detection of a sensor provided at the slide end.
In the period from t15 to t16, the first effect movable unit 352L and the first effect movable unit 352R maintain the separated state, and a predetermined image is displayed as the specific effect on the display screen of the image display device 5.

  In the period from t15 to t18, the second effect motor 367 maintains the OFF state. That is, when the first effect movable part 352L and the first effect movable part 352R are in the separated state, the current is not supplied to the second effect motor 367, so that the amount of heat generated from the second effect motor 367 is reduced. be able to.

  During the period from t18 to t19, the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R transition from the separated state to the contact state (FIGS. 44E to 44F). At this time, the states of the first effect motor 310, the first effect solenoid 316, and the second effect solenoid 341 are the same as those in FIG.

At t18, the second effect motor 367 starts the reverse rotation operation from the off state. When the second effect motor 367 rotates in the reverse direction, the first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R shift from the separated state to the contact state.
At t19, the second effect motor 367 finishes the reverse rotation operation and shifts to the off state again. After t19, since no current flows to the second effect motor 367, the amount of heat generated from the second effect motor 367 can be reduced.
The description after t20 is the same as FIG.
This is the end of the description of the second embodiment that uses FIG. 46 to maintain the contact state with the static torque of the stepping motor when the second effect motor 367 is a stepping motor.

Next, referring to FIG. 47, when the second effect motor 367 is a stepping motor, the contact state between the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R is maintained by the static torque of the stepping motor. The embodiment will be described.
FIG. 46 is a time chart showing a second embodiment in which the state is maintained by the static torque of the stepping motor. In FIG. 46, since FIGS. 46 (a) to 46 (e) are the same as FIGS. 45 (a) to 45 (e), description of the same parts is omitted.

  46 (a) to 46 (f3) show the operation of the effect movable body 302 and the operation of each actuator over time with respect to time t.

  FIG. 47 (f <b> 3) is a time chart showing the operating state of the second effect motor 367. In this embodiment, the case where a stepping motor is used as the 2nd production motor 367 is illustrated. The stepping motor illustrated in FIG. 47 (f3) has three on states that rotate forward, reverse, and stop with the second effect motor 367 turned on, and an off state that cuts the holding current. The case where it is controlled in four states is illustrated. In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 47 (f3), the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R are also kept in contact with each other by the holding torque due to the holding current, as shown in FIGS. 45 (f1) and 46 (f2). This is the same as the embodiment described in FIG. In FIG. 47 (f3), during the period in which the holding current is supplied to the second effect motor 367 to make it stand still in the on state, immediately before the effect movable body 302 starts to descend to the lower position (receives the impact of the drop). It differs from FIG. 45 (f1) in that it starts from. 45 is different from FIG. 45 (f1) in that the second effect motor 367 is changed from the on state (stationary) to the off state after the effect movable body 302 returns from the lower position to the first upper position. That is, in the control of the second effect motor 367 shown in FIG. 47 (f3), except for the time when the motor is rotating forward or backward, the first upward is performed immediately before the effect movable body 302 is in the lower position. A holding current is allowed to flow after returning to the position. Therefore, the heat generation from the second effect motor 367 can be reduced as compared with FIG. 45 (f1).

  In the period up to t11, the effect movable body 302 is held at the first upper position (FIG. 44A). At this time, the states of the first effect motor 310, the first effect solenoid 316, and the second effect solenoid 341 are the same as those in FIG.

  In the period from t12 to t13, the effect movable body 302 is lowered from the second upper position to a lower position that covers substantially the entire display screen of the image display device 5 (FIG. 44B). At this time, the states of the first effect motor 310, the first effect solenoid 316, and the second effect solenoid 341 are the same as those in FIG.

  In the period up to t13b, the second effect motor 367 is stationary in the off state. At t13b, the second effect motor 367 is changed from the off state to the on state, and the holding torque is generated. Here, t13b is slightly before t13 where the effect movable body 302 receives a drop impact at the lower position. t13b may be, for example, a detection timing of a sensor that detects immediately before the effect movable body 302 is in the lower position. T13b may be a time after a predetermined time has elapsed from t12 when the effect movable body 302 starts to descend. By generating the holding torque immediately before t13 when the effect movable body 302 is at the lower position, heat generation from the second effect motor 367 can be reduced, and the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect moveable. The contact state of the portion 352R can be maintained. By maintaining the contact state between the first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R, it is possible to prevent a reduction in effect.

  In the period from t14 to t15, the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R transition from the contact state to the separated state (FIGS. 44B to 44E). At this time, the states of the first effect motor 310, the first effect solenoid 316, and the second effect solenoid 341 are the same as those in FIG.

  At t14, the second effect motor 367 starts the forward rotation operation from the stationary state. When the second effect motor 367 rotates forward, the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R shift from the contact state to the separated state. When the first effect movable part 352L and the first effect movable part 352R shift from the contact state to the separated state, the second effect movable part 353 and the auxiliary movable part 358 become the first effect movable part 352L and the first effect movable part 352R. It appears to be visible from between (FIGS. 44C to 44E).

At t15, the first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R move to the slide end by the normal rotation of the second effect motor 367. The second effect motor 367 ends the normal rotation and shifts to a stationary state. The second effect motor 367 may be in a stationary state by detection of a sensor provided at the slide end.
In the period from t15 to t18, the second effect motor 367 maintains a stationary state.
In the period from t15 to t16, the first effect movable unit 352L and the first effect movable unit 352R maintain the separated state, and a predetermined image is displayed as the specific effect on the display screen of the image display device 5.

  During the period from t18 to t19, the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R transition from the separated state to the contact state (FIGS. 44E to 44F). At this time, the states of the first effect motor 310, the first effect solenoid 316, and the second effect solenoid 341 are the same as those in FIG.

At t18, the second effect motor 367 starts the reverse rotation operation from the stationary state. When the second effect motor 367 rotates in the reverse direction, the first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R shift from the separated state to the contact state.
At t19, the second effect motor 367 finishes the reverse rotation operation and shifts to the stationary state again. At t19, the fact that the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R are in contact with each other may be detected by, for example, a sensor provided at the slide end. The second effect motor 367 may end the reverse rotation operation by detection of a sensor provided at the slide end.

  In the period from t20 to t21, the effect movable body 302 rises from the lower position to the first upper position. At this time, the states of the first effect motor 310, the first effect solenoid 316, and the second effect solenoid 341 are the same as those in FIG.

At t21a, the second effect motor 367 is changed from the stationary state to the off state. t21a is a time after a lapse of t21 when the effect movable body 302 rises to the first upper position. For example, t21a may be after a predetermined time from the detection result of the sensor that detects that the effect movable body 302 has risen to the first upper position. By setting the timing for turning off the second effect motor 367 to be a little after the effect movable member 302 has been raised to the first upper position, the holding current is turned off after the effect movable member 302 has stopped reliably. Therefore, the first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R can reliably maintain the contact state.
The description of the third embodiment using FIG. 47 that maintains the contact state with the static torque of the stepping motor when the second effect motor 367 is a stepping motor ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 48, when the second effect motor 367 is a DC motor, the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R are maintained in contact with the rotational torque of the DC motor. The embodiment will be described.
FIG. 48 is a time chart showing the first embodiment in which the state is maintained by the rotational torque of the DC motor. 48, since FIGS. 48 (a) to 48 (e) are the same as FIGS. 45 (a) to 45 (e), description of the same parts is omitted.
48 (a) to 48 (f4) show the operation of the effect movable body 302 and the operation of each actuator over time t with the passage of time.

FIG. 48 (f <b> 4) is a time chart showing the operating state of the second effect motor 367. In the present embodiment, a case where a DC motor is used as the second effect motor 367 is exemplified. The DC motor shown in FIG. 48 (f4) exemplifies a case where the second effect motor 367 is controlled in two operation states in which the second effect motor 367 is rotated forward and reverse. It is difficult for a DC motor to generate a static torque that was possible with a stepping motor. Therefore, in the embodiment illustrated in FIGS. 48 to 50, a case will be described in which the rotational torque of the DC motor is generated in order to maintain the contact state between the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R.
As described with reference to FIG. 42, the rack 373 is slid in the left-right direction via the drive gear 371 and the driven gear 372 by the rotation of the second effect motor 367, and the first effect movable portion of the effect movable body 302 is rotated. Open and close 352L and first effect movable portion 352R. When the second effect motor 367 rotates in the forward direction, the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R move in the opening direction and shift from the contact state to the separated state. On the other hand, when the second effect motor 367 rotates in the reverse direction, the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R move in the closing direction and shift from the separated state to the contact state. In the present embodiment, a case where the DC motor is on / off controlled is illustrated. For example, the voltage value applied to the second effect motor 367 in the on state is constant. However, the voltage value or current value applied to the motor may be variable.

  In the period up to t11, the effect movable body 302 is held at the first upper position (FIG. 44A). In the period from t11 to t12, the effect movable body 302 rises from the first upper position to the second upper position. In the period from t12 to t13, the effect movable body 302 is lowered from the second upper position to a lower position that covers substantially the entire display screen of the image display device 5 (FIG. 44B). Furthermore, in the period from t14 to t15, the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R transition from the contact state to the separated state (FIGS. 44B to 44E). In the period from t11 to t15, the states of the first effect motor 310, the first effect solenoid 316, and the second effect solenoid 341 are the same as those in FIG.

  On the other hand, in the period up to t14, the second effect motor 367 is controlled to be in the reverse rotation on state. When the second effect motor 367 is in the reverse rotation ON state, the second effect motor 367 generates torque in a direction to close the first effect movable part 352L and the first effect movable part 352R. Therefore, in the period up to t14, the second effect motor 367 can maintain the contact state between the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R.

  At t14, the second effect motor 367 starts the forward rotation operation from the reverse rotation. When the second effect motor 367 rotates forward, the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R shift from the contact state to the separated state. When the first effect movable part 352L and the first effect movable part 352R shift from the contact state to the separated state, the second effect movable part 353 and the auxiliary movable part 358 become the first effect movable part 352L and the first effect movable part 352R. It appears to be visible from between (FIGS. 44C to 44E).

  In the period from t14 to t15, the first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R move to the slide end by the normal rotation of the second effect motor 367. The second effect motor 367 continues to rotate normally even after the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R are opened to the slide end. Therefore, the first effect movable part 352L and the first effect movable part 352R receive the force for maintaining the separated state by the rotational torque of the second effect motor 367 even during the period from t15 to t18.

  During the period from t18 to t19, the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R transition from the separated state to the contact state (FIGS. 44E to 44F). At this time, the states of the first effect motor 310, the first effect solenoid 316, and the second effect solenoid 341 are the same as those in FIG.

At t18, the second effect motor 367 transitions from the normal rotation state to the reverse rotation state. When the second effect motor 367 rotates in the reverse direction, the first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R shift from the separated state to the contact state. The second effect motor 367 is maintained in the reverse rotation state after t19 when the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R are in contact with each other.
The description after t18 is the same as FIG.
Above, description of 1st Embodiment which maintains a contact state with the rotational torque of a DC motor when the 2nd production motor 367 is a DC motor using FIG. 48 is complete | finished.

Next, referring to FIG. 49, when the second effect motor 367 is a DC motor, the second effect of maintaining the contact state between the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R with the rotational torque of the DC motor. The embodiment will be described.
FIG. 49 is a time chart showing a second embodiment in which the state is maintained by the rotational torque of the DC motor. 49, since FIG. 49 (a)-(e) is the same as FIG. 45 (a)-(e), description about the same part is abbreviate | omitted.
49A to 49F show the operation of the effect movable body 302 and the operation of each actuator with respect to time t as time elapses.

  FIG. 49 (f <b> 5) is a time chart showing the operating state of the second effect motor 367. In the present embodiment, a case where a DC motor is used as the second effect motor 367 is exemplified. The DC motor shown in FIG. 49 (f5) exemplifies a case where the second effect motor 367 is controlled in three operation states in which the second effect motor 367 is rotated forward and backward in the on state and further turned off. The control of the second effect motor 367 shown in FIG. 49 (f5) is to reduce the amount of heat generated from the second effect motor 367 as compared with FIG. 48 (f4) by creating a period in which the second effect motor 367 is turned off. ing. In the present embodiment, the case where the second effect motor 367 is controlled in three operation states including the off state in order to reduce the heat generation amount is illustrated. However, for example, instead of the off state, during normal rotation or reverse rotation An on state in which torque in the reverse rotation direction is generated by a voltage value (or current value) smaller than the voltage value (or current value) at the time may be used.

  In the period up to t11, the effect movable body 302 is held at the first upper position (FIG. 44A). In the period from t11 to t12, the effect movable body 302 rises from the first upper position to the second upper position. In the period from t12 to t13, the effect movable body 302 is lowered from the second upper position to a lower position that covers substantially the entire display screen of the image display device 5 (FIG. 44B). Furthermore, in the period from t14 to t15, the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R transition from the contact state to the separated state (FIGS. 44B to 44E). In the period from t11 to t15, the states of the first effect motor 310, the first effect solenoid 316, and the second effect solenoid 341 are the same as those in FIG.

  On the other hand, during the period up to t11, the second effect motor 367 is in the off state, and is controlled to be in the reverse rotation on state at t11. During the period from t11 when the effect movable body 302 starts to rise to t14 when the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R start separation from the contact state, the second effect motor 367 rotates in the reverse direction. The on state is maintained. By maintaining the reverse rotation on state, the second effect motor 367 can maintain the contact state between the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R.

  At t14, the second effect motor 367 starts the forward rotation operation from the reverse rotation. When the second effect motor 367 rotates forward, the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R shift from the contact state to the separated state. When the first effect movable part 352L and the first effect movable part 352R shift from the contact state to the separated state, the second effect movable part 353 and the auxiliary movable part 358 become the first effect movable part 352L and the first effect movable part 352R. It appears to be visible from between (FIGS. 44C to 44E).

  In the period from t14 to t15, the first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R move to the slide end by the normal rotation of the second effect motor 367. The second effect motor 367 continues to rotate normally even after the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R are opened to the slide end. Therefore, the first effect movable part 352L and the first effect movable part 352R receive the force for maintaining the separated state by the rotational torque of the second effect motor 367 even during the period from t15 to t18.

  During the period from t18 to t19, the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R transition from the separated state to the contact state (FIGS. 44E to 44F). At this time, the states of the first effect motor 310, the first effect solenoid 316, and the second effect solenoid 341 are the same as those in FIG.

  At t18, the second effect motor 367 changes from the normal rotation state to the reverse rotation state. When the second effect motor 367 rotates in the reverse direction, the first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R shift from the separated state to the contact state. The second effect motor 367 is maintained in the reverse rotation state after t19 when the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R are in contact with each other.

  In the period from t20 to t21, the effect movable body 302 rises from the lower position to the first upper position. At this time, the states of the first effect motor 310, the first effect solenoid 316, and the second effect solenoid 341 are the same as those in FIG.

At t21, the second effect motor 367 is turned off from the reverse rotation state. The amount of heat generated from the second effect motor 367 can be reduced by entering the off state.
Above, description of 2nd Embodiment which maintains a contact state with the rotational torque of a DC motor when the 2nd production motor 367 is a DC motor using FIG. 49 is complete | finished.

Next, referring to FIG. 50, when the second effect motor 367 is a DC motor, the third effect of maintaining the contact state between the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R with the rotational torque of the DC motor. The embodiment will be described.
FIG. 50 is a time chart showing a second embodiment in which the state is maintained by the rotational torque of the DC motor. In FIG. 50, since FIGS. 50A to 50E are the same as FIGS. 45A to 45E, description of the same parts is omitted.
50A to 50F show the operation of the effect movable body 302 with respect to time t and the operation of each actuator as time elapses.

  FIG. 50 (f 6) is a time chart showing the operating state of the second effect motor 367. In the present embodiment, a case where a DC motor is used as the second effect motor 367 is exemplified. The DC motor shown in FIG. 50 (f6) exemplifies a case where the second effect motor 367 is controlled in three operation states in which the second effect motor 367 is rotated forward and backward in the on state and further turned off. In the control of the second effect motor 367 shown in FIG. 50 (f6), the period in which the second effect motor 367 is turned off is made longer than that in FIG. 49 (f5). By increasing the period during which it is turned off, the amount of heat generated from the second effect motor 367 is further reduced as compared with FIG. 49 (f5). Also in the present embodiment, for example, torque in the reverse rotation direction is generated by a voltage value (or current value) smaller than the voltage value (or current value) at the time of forward rotation or reverse rotation instead of the off state. An on state may be used.

  In the period up to t11, the effect movable body 302 is held at the first upper position (FIG. 44A). In the period from t11 to t12, the effect movable body 302 rises from the first upper position to the second upper position. In the period from t12 to t13, the effect movable body 302 is lowered from the second upper position to a lower position that covers substantially the entire display screen of the image display device 5 (FIG. 44B). Furthermore, in the period from t14 to t15, the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R transition from the contact state to the separated state (FIGS. 44B to 44E). In the period from t11 to t15, the states of the first effect motor 310, the first effect solenoid 316, and the second effect solenoid 341 are the same as those in FIG.

  In the period up to t13b, the second effect motor 367 is stationary in the off state. At t13b, the second effect motor 367 is changed from the off state to the reverse rotation state to generate a rotational torque. t13b is slightly before t13 when the effect movable body 302 receives a drop impact at the lower position. t13b may be, for example, a detection timing of a sensor that detects immediately before the effect movable body 302 is in the lower position. T13b may be a time after a predetermined time has elapsed from t12 when the effect movable body 302 starts to descend. By generating rotational torque in the reverse rotation immediately before t13 when the effect movable body 302 is in the lower position, heat generation from the second effect motor 367 can be reduced, and the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352L can be reduced. It is possible to maintain the contact state of the 1 effect moving portion 352R. By maintaining the contact state between the first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R, it is possible to prevent a reduction in effect.

  At t14, the second effect motor 367 starts the forward rotation operation from the reverse rotation, and the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R shift from the contact state to the separated state.

  In the period from t14 to t15, the first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R move to the slide end by the normal rotation of the second effect motor 367. The second effect motor 367 continues to rotate normally after the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R are opened to the slide end. Therefore, the first effect movable part 352L and the first effect movable part 352R receive the force for maintaining the separated state by the rotational torque of the second effect motor 367 even during the period from t15 to t18.

  At t15a, the second effect motor 367 is turned off from the normal rotation state. Here, t15a is a time slightly after t15 when the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R move to the slide end. For example, t15a may be after a predetermined time from a detection result of a sensor that detects that the first effect movable unit 352L and the first effect movable unit 352R have moved to the slide end. By setting the timing for turning off the second effect motor 367 to a time slightly after t15 when the first effect movable unit 352L and the first effect movable unit 352R move to the slide end, the first effect movable unit 352L Since the torque in the forward rotation state can be turned off after the first effect moving unit 352R has stopped reliably, the first effect moving unit 352L and the first effect moving unit 352R can be reliably separated from each other. In addition, the amount of heat generated from the second effect motor 367 can be reduced during the period from t15b to t18.

  During the period from t18 to t19, the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R transition from the separated state to the contact state (FIGS. 44E to 44F). At this time, the states of the first effect motor 310, the first effect solenoid 316, and the second effect solenoid 341 are the same as those in FIG.

  At t18, the second effect motor 367 changes from the off state to the reverse rotation state. When the second effect motor 367 rotates in the reverse direction, the first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R shift from the separated state to the contact state. The second effect motor 367 is maintained in the reverse rotation state after t19 when the first effect movable portion 352L and the first effect movable portion 352R are in contact with each other.

  In the period from t20 to t21, the effect movable body 302 rises from the lower position to the first upper position. At this time, the states of the first effect motor 310, the first effect solenoid 316, and the second effect solenoid 341 are the same as those in FIG.

At t21a, the second effect motor 367 is turned off from the reverse rotation state. t21a is a time after a lapse of t21 when the effect movable body 302 rises to the first upper position. For example, t21a may be after a predetermined time from the detection result of the sensor that detects that the effect movable body 302 has risen to the first upper position. By setting the timing for turning off the second effect motor 367 to be a little after the effect movable member 302 has been raised to the first upper position, the holding current is turned off after the effect movable member 302 has stopped reliably. Therefore, the first effect moving part 352L and the first effect moving part 352R can reliably maintain the contact state.
Above, description of 3rd Embodiment which maintains a contact state with the rotational torque of a DC motor when the 2nd production motor 367 is a DC motor using FIG. 50 is complete | finished.

  As mentioned above, although embodiment of this invention was described, various effect operation | movement including the apparatus structure of pachinko machine 1, a data structure, the process shown with the flowchart, and the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the main image display apparatus 5 was carried out. These can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The gaming machine of the embodiment is a gaming machine that performs a game, and a first accessory that is movable from a first position to a second position, and a second accessory that is movable from the first position to the second position. And holding means for holding the first accessory and the second accessory in contact with each other when the first accessory and the second accessory move from the first position to the second position. However, this is an example.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the second effect motor 367 is exemplified as the holding unit, but the holding unit is not limited to this. The holding unit may be, for example, a holding unit that magnetically holds the first accessory and the second accessory, or a holding unit that mechanically holds the first accessory and the second accessory. Magnetic means or mechanical means may be used alone or in combination with means using the motor shown in the present embodiment.

  As the magnetic holding means, the approaching state of the first and second actors can be held using the attractive force of a permanent magnet or an electromagnet. For example, magnets may be arranged so that the first and second actors are attracted to each other, and the contact state between the first and second actors may be maintained. Moreover, a magnet may be arrange | positioned to either one of a 1st accessory and a 2nd accessory, and a magnetic body may be arrange | positioned to the other, and you may make it hold | maintain the approach state of a 1st accessory and a 2nd accessory. . When using a permanent magnet to maintain the approaching state, in order to separate the first accessory from the second accessory with a force equal to or greater than the attractive force of the permanent magnet, for example, the first A two-effect motor 367 can be used. When an electromagnet is used to maintain the approaching state, the approaching state can be maintained, released, and separated by turning on / off the electromagnet and changing the direction of the current.

As the mechanical holding means, for example, a locking member that mechanically locks the first role and the second role can be used. For example, when the first accessory and the second accessory are between the first position and the first position to the second position, the first accessory and the second accessory are locked by the locking member, The locking member may be removed by releasing the locking member when the first role and the second role are in the second position.
Moreover, you may make it hold mechanically the contact state of a 1st accessory and a 2nd accessory using a hook-and-loop fastener or an adhesive member as a mechanical holding means, for example.

  In the present embodiment, since the output of the second effect motor 367 slides the first accessory and the second accessory via the drive system such as the driven gear 372 and the rack 373, the second effect motor 367. The case where the approaching state of the first accessory and the second accessory is maintained with the static torque and the rotational torque is exemplified. However, for example, a brake function may be added to a part of the drive system so as to maintain the approaching state of the first accessory and the second accessory. For example, the second effect motor 367 may be a motor with a brake, and the approaching state of the first and second actors may be held by the brake torque. Alternatively, a brake may be disposed in a part of the drive system, and the brake may be directly applied to the drive system so as to maintain the approaching state of the first accessory and the second accessory. As the brake, for example, an electromagnetic brake can be used.

  In the present embodiment, the case where two positions, the first upper position and the second upper position, are used as the first position is exemplified, but the first position is not limited to this. For example, three or more positions may be used as the first position. For example, you may make it change the position which starts a fall with a production | presentation aspect. Moreover, although the picture of this embodiment illustrated the case where a lower position is used as a 2nd position, a 2nd position is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of positions may be prepared as the second position.

Although the gaming machine of the embodiment is exemplified by a case further including display means capable of displaying, this is an example.
For example, in the present embodiment, the case where the image display device 5 is used as the display unit is illustrated, but the display unit may be other. For example, it may be a display means provided on the first accessory or the second accessory. A plurality of display means may be used.

In the gaming machine of the embodiment, the first combination and the second combination have been illustrated by moving from the first position to the second position by dropping under their own weight, but this is an example.
For example, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 37, the first combination and the second combination are dropped by their own weight by releasing the meshing of the second gear 312 and the third gear 313. A spring for biasing a downward force may be attached to the first accessory and the second accessory, and the first accessory and the second accessory may be moved by the force of the spring.

The gaming machine of the embodiment exemplifies a case in which the first winning combination and the second winning combination shift from the contact state to the separation state after a predetermined period after moving from the first position to the second position. It is an example.
For example, the predetermined period may be zero. That is, the first accessory and the second accessory may move to the separated state immediately after moving from the first position to the second position. For example, when the speed at which the first and second objects move from the first position to the second position is slow, the player can recognize that the first and second objects have reached the second position. Therefore, it is possible to recognize the change from the contact state to the separation state, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Although the gaming machine of the embodiment exemplifies the case where the first combination and the second combination are further provided with the third combination that appears by shifting from the contact state to the separation state, this is an example.
For example, in the present embodiment, the case where the third accessory appears from between the separated first and second actors is shown. However, the third accessory is a combination of the first and second actors. You may make it appear from other than between. For example, the third combination may appear from the top of the first combination and the second combination.

  In the present embodiment, for example, a game score for use in a game is given by using a frequency that is a game value having a size specified by record information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine using the given game score or a game score given by winning a game.

  In each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine. However, the present invention is not limited to a plurality of types according to the operation of the operation lever by the player when a medal is inserted and a predetermined bet number is set. When the symbol is rotated according to the stop button operation by the player and the combination of the stop symbol becomes a specific symbol combination, it is applied to a slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player It is also possible to do.

That is, the gaming machine in the present embodiment is a gaming machine that performs a game (for example, a slot machine that performs a game by rotating a plurality of types of symbols as described above), and has a first position (for example, as described above). A first character (for example, a game as described above) that can move from a first position (for example, a slot machine for performing a game) to a second position (for example, a second position in a slot machine for games as described above). A first effect model in the slot machine that performs the game) and a second accessory that can move from the first position to the second position (for example, the second effect in the slot machine that performs the game as described above) The first accessory and the second accessory are kept in contact with each other when the first accessory and the second accessory move from the first position to the second position. Holding means (example If the holding means such as the slot machine to perform a game as described above) and may be a gaming machine having a.
In addition, the game in which the first accessory and the second accessory form a specific shape (for example, the shape of a moving movable body in a slot machine for performing a game as described above) when in contact with each other. It may be a machine.
Furthermore, a specific effect (for example, an image display device that is executed by an effect control CPU in a slot machine that performs a game as described above as the first accessory and the second accessory move to the second position. A game machine provided with effect means (for example, an effect control CPU in a slot machine that performs a game as described above) for executing an effect or the like displayed on the screen.

  Moreover, the modification etc. which demonstrated the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment are applicable also to the slot machine etc. which perform the above games.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium with respect to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1; It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by pre-installing the storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the change is started in order to notify the change control pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect and the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream to the effect control microcomputer. Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer using two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-ream, a slide effect, etc. (2) Before the stop, a command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode is transmitted, and the second command is the so-called second in the case where the reach is reached (such as the reach type, the presence / absence of the re-lottery effect). You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect after a stop. In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in the change display based on the change time derived from the combination of the two commands. In the game control microcomputer, the change time is notified by each of the two commands, and a specific change mode executed at each timing is selected by the effect control microcomputer. Also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the “ratio” is, for example, a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. , A: B = 100%: 0% is included in the relationship (that is, one is assigned 100% and the other is assigned 0%).

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, various rendering operations including the rendering operation of the rendering image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the scope.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine in which a gaming ball is paid out as a prize to the player, and the player launches the paid gaming ball into the gaming area to play a game. A game score for use in a game is given using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified from record information of a game recording medium such as a card or a membership card, and a given game score, or The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by using a game score given by winning a game and driving a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine into the game area.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the game machine uses a game medium as an example. However, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media. The present invention can also be applied to an enclosing game machine that encloses a game medium such as a ball and gives a score when a prize granting condition is satisfied.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a gaming machine is shown that is controlled to a probable change state after the jackpot game is ended based on the determination that the probable change jackpot has been determined. However, the present invention is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball apparatus in which a predetermined probability changing area is provided (a certain variable winning ball apparatus may be provided in a single special variable winning ball apparatus, or a plurality of special variable winning balls may be provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game. The configuration described in each of the above embodiments can be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a certain change state after the completion.

  That is, based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area provided in the game area, variable display means is provided for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified and for displaying the display result. A gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on the display means, but when the gaming score is not zero, The game ball enclosed in the game is driven into the game area, the game is performed, the game score is subtracted according to the game ball being driven, and the game score is awarded according to the game ball winning in the winning area provided in the game area The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that adds the values. Such a gaming machine includes a gaming recording medium insertion slot for inserting a gaming recording medium in which information capable of specifying the magnitude of gaming value that can be used to add gaming scores, and a gaming recording You may provide the game recording medium processing means which reads the recording information currently recorded on the game recording medium inserted in the medium insertion port.

  In the above embodiment, a gaming machine that performs variable display of a plurality of types of special symbols each identifiable and derives and displays a definite special symbol that is a variable display result has been shown. It is not limited. For example, the changing special symbol may be different from the confirmed special symbol derived and displayed as the variable display result. In other words, the fixed special symbol derived and displayed as the variable display result may not be included in the plurality of types of special symbols that fluctuate.

  Further, in the above embodiment, a gaming machine that performs variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can each be identified and derives and displays a finalized decorative symbol that is a variable display result has been shown. It is not limited. For example, the decorative pattern that fluctuates may be different from the fixed decorative pattern that is derived and displayed as a variable display result. In other words, the fixed decorative symbols derived and displayed as the variable display result may not be included in the plurality of types of decorative symbols that change.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols and decorative symbols “1” to “9” are variably displayed and a display result is derived and displayed has been shown. Not limited to. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

  In addition, the update of the numerical data indicating the random number value may be performed so that the random numbers are not synchronized by changing the update timing or changing the update range of each random number.

In the above embodiment, the main board 11 stores a random value determination table (display result determination table, jackpot type determination table, and variation category determination table), and is extracted from the main board 11 at the time of starting winning. Based on the random number values (MR1 to MR3), the main board 11 refers to the random value determination table, and determines the random value determination process (determining whether or not to win, determining the variation category, and hitting the jackpot. In this case, the effect control board 12 receives the determination result determined in the main board 11 and executes the pre-reading notice effect based on the received determination result. The execution mode of the pre-reading notice effect is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control board 12 stores the random value determination table, and the effect control board 12 receives the random number itself extracted from the main board 11 from the main board 11, and based on the received random value. The random value determination process may be executed with reference to the random value determination table, and the pre-reading notice effect may be executed based on the determination result of the determination process. That is, the random number determination process may be performed on the effect control board 12.
Further, the random number determination process may be performed on both the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. For example, the effect control board 12 may receive a part of the random number values and execute the random number determination process, and may receive the determination result determined in the main board 11. Specifically, for example, the presentation control board 12 receives the random number values (MR1 and MR2), determines whether or not to win the jackpot, and if it is a jackpot, determines the type of jackpot and also determines the random value. You may make it receive the determination result of the fluctuation | variation category determined with the main board | substrate 11 based on (MR3). That is, the effect control board 12 can execute the pre-reading notice effect based on the determination result determined by itself and the determination result determined by the main board 11.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Game board 3 Frame 4A, 4B for game machines Special image display device 5 Image display device 50 Sub image display device 5HL First start prize memory display area 5HR Second start prize memory display area 5H Start prize memory display area 6A Normal winning ball device 6B Normal variable winning ball device 7 Special variable winning ball device 8 Speaker 9 Lamp 11 Main board 12 Production control board 13 Audio control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 20 Normal symbol display 21 Gate switch 22A 1st Start port switch 22B Second start port switch 23 Count switch 31A Stick controller 31B Push button 100 Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ROM
102, 122 RAM
103 CPU
104, 124 Random number circuit 105, 125 I / O
120 CPU for effect control
123 Display control unit

Claims (2)

A gaming machine for playing games,
A first accessory movable from a first position to a second position;
A second accessory movable from the first position to the second position;
Control that changes the contact state where the first accessory and the second accessory are in contact with each other and the separated state where the first accessory and the second accessory are separated by driving the stepping motor. Drive control means for performing
When the first accessory and the second accessory are in the second position, an effect unit that executes a specific effect;
With
The drive control means continues to energize the stepping motor, and can perform a holding control for holding the state of the first accessory and the second accessory by the holding torque of the stepping motor. Including means,
When the first accessory and the second accessory move from the first position to the second position, they are in the contact state;
The holding means is
The holding control is not executed when the first accessory and the second accessory are in the first position,
Executing the holding control when said first roles equivalent to the second roles material is moved from said first position to said second position,
Yu technique machine.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising display means capable of displaying.

Images